Introduction - Connect, Inc.

Twin Client Reference
For Devices Manufactured by Symbol Technologies
Copyright
1996 - 2004 by Connect, Inc.
All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced in full or in part, in any form, without
prior written permission of Connect Inc., 1701 Quincy Avenue, Suites 5 & 6, Naperville, IL 60540.
Connect, Inc. makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents of this
document and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness
for any particular purpose. Further, Connect, Inc. reserves the right to revise this
publication and to make changes to it from time to time without obligation to notify any
person or organization of such revision or changes.
Trademarks
OpenAir Linux™, OpenAir Windows™, OpenAir 400™, TwinClient ™, and AirLinc™
are trademarks of Connect, Inc.
Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Production
This manual was written, edited, and produced by:
Connect, Inc.
1701 Quincy Avenue, Suites 5 & 6
Naperville, IL 60540
www.connectrf.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 • Introduction...............................................................................................1-1
Release Notes………………………………………………………………………………… 1-1
Overview of Connect, Inc.’s Product Line……………………………………………….. 1-3
Twin Client Overview………………………………………………………………………… 1-3
In This Manual………………………………………………………………………………… 1-5
Chapter 2 • Installation.................................................................................................2-1
Requirements…………………………………………………………………………………. 2-1
Downloading From the WEB……………………………………………………………….. 2-1
Running Setup from a Download File……………………………………………………. 2-1
Installation…………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-2
Running the Manager……………………………………………………………………….. 2-5
Chapter 3 • Quick Start.................................................................................................3-1
Configuring the Manager…………………………………………………………………… 3-1
Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download Procedure……………………………………3-10
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure………………………………………….. 3-13
Symbol CE Terminal Download Procedure……………………………………………. 3-22
Cold Booting the Terminal………………………………………………………………… 3-23
Starting a Telnet Session…………………………………………………………………. 3-25
Chapter 4 • Standard Setup………………………………………………………………… 4-1
Setup Using Twin Client Manager………………………………………………………….4-1
Importing Custom Configurations………………………………………………………… 4-8
Terminal Setup Using Symbol-Style Barcodes…………………………………………. 4-9
Terminal Setup Using Symbol-Style Menus…………………………………………….. 4-9
Terminal Setup Using Twin Client Menus…………………………………………………4-9
Authorizing Twin Client……………………………………………………………………. 4-11
Chapter 5 • Advanced Setup………………………………………………………………. 5-1
Selecting the Advanced Setup…………………………………………………………….. 5-1
Customizing the Keyboard…………………………………………………………………. 5-2
Customizing the Display……………………………………………………………………. 5-4
Customizing the Scanner…………………………………………………………………… 5-8
External Scanner Setup…………………………………………………………………… 5-11
Setting Log Levels………………………………………………………………………….. 5-12
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
iii
Customizing Timers…………………………………………………………………………. 5-13
Customizing Alarms…………………………………………………………………………. 5-14
Customizing Printers………………………………………………………………………… 5-17
Miscellaneous Customizations……………………………………………………………. 5-20
Chapter 6 • Advanced Integration………………………………………………………….. 6-1
Keyboard/Mapping…………………………………………………………………………….. 6-1
Keyboard Macros……………………………………………………………………………… 6-5
Scanner/Data Mapping………………………………………………………………………... 6-7
Scanner/Data Editing…………………………………………………………………………. 6-8
Scanner/Decoder Control…………………………………………………………………… 6-11
Display/Mapping……………………………………………………………………………… 6-13
Display/Formatting…………………………………………………………………………… 6-15
Printer/Init………………………………………………………………………………………6-15
Dialog…………………………………………………………………………………………... 6-16
Extended Commands……………………………………………………………………….. 6-21
Advanced Display Options for VT/HP…………………………………………………….. 6-26
Advanced 3270 Keyboard Options………………………………………………………... 6-27
New Environ Telnet Extension…………………………………………………………….. 6-29
Chapter 7 • The Display Formatter………………………………………………………….7-1
Setting the Emulation………………………………………………………………………… 7-1
Starting the Emulator…………………………………………………………………………. 7-2
Taking Snapshots……………………………………………………………………………... 7-4
Formatting………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-5
Chapter 8 • Software Management………………………………………………………….8-1
Airloader Auto-Configuration……………………………………………………………….. 8-1
TN Plus Features………………………………………………………………………………. 8-7
AirLoad Configuration………………………………………………………………………. 8-17
Downloading Symbol Files…………………………………………………………………. 8-17
Creating Custom Hex Files…………………………………………………………………. 8-28
Chapter 9 • Character Sets……………………………………………………………………9-1
ISO 8859-1 Character Set…………………………………………………………………….. 9-1
ASCII Character Set I…………………………………………………………………………. 9-5
ASCII Character Set II…………………………………………………………………………. 9-6
iv
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
Chapter 10 • Keypad Configuration ........................................................................10-1
Keypad Figures……………………………………………………………………………. 10-1
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables……………………………………………………… 10-50
Symbol Terminal Control Sequences………………………………………………… 10-77
Chapter 11 • Error Message Resolution Guide ......................................................11-1
Chapter 12 • AirBEAM Operation ............................................................................12-1
AirBEAM Introduction…………………………………………………………………….. 12-1
AirBEAM Instructions…………………………………………………………………….. 12-2
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
v
Chapter 1 • Introduction
Release Notes
The following new features are present in the Symbol 7.0 release.
•= There is a new authorization code scheme involving updates to the Twin Client
Authorization screen and to the Connect web site. You are now able to enter more
information on our web site while authorizing your terminal. Also, you may now add
terminals to an existing OpenAir system.
•= There is a new Manual Authorization button in the Authorization screen. Using this
button is an alternate method of obtaining an authorization code for a terminal.
Clicking on this button, and manually entering your mac address in the screen that
appears enables you to generate individual authorization codes.
•= There is a new Details button in the Authorization screen to prioritize Airloader
options. Click on the Details button to number the options in its screen in the order
of your priority. The options are moved using the Up and Down buttons in the
Authorization Details screen.
•= There is a new Listing button in the Authorization screen. Click on the Listing button
to view authorization codes issued. The authorization codes in use along with their
corresponding serial numbers will appear.
•= There are new TN Plus options (Screen Watcher, Terminal Messenger, RF Monitor)
in the Tools menu. With Screen Watcher, enter the terminal’s IP address and a
screen will appear with a display resembling your terminal screen. With Terminal
Messenger, you may enter a message to send, select the terminal to receive this
message, and send the message. RF Monitor allows you to view a log of the
terminal’s activity after entering its Terminal IP address and Terminal IP Port.
•= There is a new server object Get/Save feature in the Servers screen of the Settings
menu. Use its Load button if you want to load an .svr file. Use its Save As button if
you want to save your file as an .svr file.
•= There are new options in the Terminal Operations screen. "Use GUI menus and
screens" is a CE option that makes the terminal program act more Windows-like.
Additional options include check boxes to enable aggressive linear decoding and
enable the centering beam during imaging.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
1-1
Introduction
•= There is a new Schedule button on the Group screen that is used for scheduling an
automatic Airloader update. Click on this button to view a dialog box for scheduling
an automatic Airloader update.
•=
There is a new Thin Mode button in the Terminal Auto-Configuration screen. This
button enables you to cause all terminals in a group that are currently running in
thick mode to be switched to thin mode the next time Airloader is run on the
terminal.
•= There is a new Server Transfer option in the Tools menu. You may enter your server
address in its FTP Settings screen to send object editor and configuration files from
Windows to your Linux box.
The following are known deficiencies of the Symbol 7.0 release.
•= 3000 terminal: If you load any 3000 terminal with the standard (serial) method, you
will have reduced language support due to HEX space limitations. If you load using
AirBeam AirLoad, or Custom HEX, you will have full language support.
•= 3000 terminal: The serially loaded 3270 1D hex file contains only the 46 key
terminals due to hex space limitations. Using AirBeam, AirLoad, or Custom HEX,
provides support for all of the keyboards.
•= 3000 terminal: The serially loaded 5250 1D and 2D hex files contain only the 46 key
terminals due to hex space limitations. Using AirBeam, AirLoad, or Custom HEX,
will provide support for all of the keyboards.
•= 6800 35-key terminal: This terminal is supported if you load with AirBeam,
AirLoad, or Custom HEX. It is not supported using the standard serial load method
due to HEX space limitations.
•= 7500 terminal: The full ISO-8859 character set is not supported.
•= 7500 terminal (when using AirBeam): Choosing the “Exit to DOS” option from the
setup menu will result in the execution of AirLoader, after which the terminal will
return to the DOS prompt.
•= 7500 terminal: When “backlight” is set under the “Timers” tab to any value other
than “0”, the backlight still must be turned on manually, but will automatically turn
off to the desired value set (in seconds).
•= 68xx and 7500 terminals: When these terminals that have 2D scanners are run in
3270 emulation, scanning of 2D barcodes over 80 characters is not supported due
to memory limitation.
1-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Overview of Connect, Inc.’s Product Line
Overview of Connect, Inc.’s Product Line
Connect, Inc.’s products bridge the gap between portable wireless devices and network
applications, making the entire wireless enterprise as productive, efficient, and reliable
as possible. The Connect, Inc. family of products supports the following:
•= All Internet-compatible wireless networks, encompassing virtually all wireless LAN
technologies on the market today. Spectrum One, a proprietary spread spectrum
wireless technology in the 900Mhz band, is also supported.
•= All Internet-compatible wire network media, including Ethernet.
•= All major user interfaces, including HTML, VT/HP, 3270, and 5250.
•= All possible network application architectures including direct client, client-server,
and three-tier client server.
The product line of Connect, Inc. consists of two major product families that work in
unison to deliver a single, complete solution for the entire wireless enterprise.
•= OpenAir: Hardware and middleware solutions for the wireless automatic
identification industry. This family includes OpenAir Linux, OpenAir Windows,
OpenAir 400, and the universal terminal client software, Twin Client.
•= DataLinc: Application development tools for the wireless client-server environment.
The family currently includes AirLinc for use with ODBC compliant databases.
Twin Client Overview
Twin Client is a software package that provides VT100, VT220, HP700/92, TN3270
(Telnet 3270), and TN5250 (Telnet 5250) emulation on portable terminals. It includes a
Windows program for configuring and downloading the software to the portable
terminals.
Modes of Operation
Twin Client operates in either of two modes: Telnet or Server client.
•= Telnet mode provides a Telnet connection directly to host computers and their
applications.
•= Server mode communicates directly with an OpenAir or AirLinc server, which in
turn provides the connection to host computers and their applications.
The primary difference between the two modes is in processing load distribution: In
Telnet mode, all application protocol processing is performed on the terminal, while in
Server mode all of the processing takes place on an intermediate OpenAir or AirLinc
server. Another important difference is optimization: In Server mode, the OpenAir or
AirLinc server introduces display optimization, data compression, and several other
techniques that can dramatically reduce wireless network traffic.
These optimizations are not possible in Telnet mode. Additionally, Server mode provides
the ability to do four Terminal Sessions.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
1-3
Introduction
All of the user interface features, functions, and capabilities remain the same, regardless
of the mode of operation.
Major Features
Twin Client for Symbol terminals offers the following benefits:
•= Simplicity: Twin Client is preset to match the default keyboard overlays and
functionality of the Symbol Telnet client. No special configuration procedures are
required.
•= Compatibility: Existing Symbol installations that have been customized can be
easily converted to Twin Client by importing the existing configuration file, and/or
by using the alternate Symbol-style terminal configuration menu system.
•= Management: Administrators and integrators can monitor and modify the software
revision and configuration of each portable terminal from any Windows PC attached
to the TCP/IP network. Changes are downloaded to the terminals over the wireless
LAN automatically.
•= Formatting: The Twin Client Terminal Screen Formatter feature is built-in, allowing
integrators to tailor host application displays to suit the needs of the terminal
operators without modifying the applications.
•= Internationalization: Error message language translations and character sets are
menu selections. No additional integration is necessary.
•= Migration: Conversion to an OpenAir or AirLinc client-server environment is
automatic because the server client is included in the Twin Client software already
downloaded to the terminal.
1-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
In This Manual
In This Manual
This manual is organized as follows:
•= Chapter one provides an overview of the Connect, Inc. product line and an
introduction to the Twin Client.
•= Chapter two describes how to load the Twin Client Manager software on a Windows
95, 98, ME, XP, NT/2000, or 2003 PC.
•= Chapter three describes how to quickly configure the Twin Client Manager and the
terminal for automatic, over-the-air software download and subsequent Telnet
session startup.
•= Chapter four describes how to change the Standard setup options specific to VT/HP,
3270, and 5250 emulations. The simple, time-saving features for converting existing
Symbol Telnet client installations to Twin Client are also described here.
•= Chapter five describes how to use the Advanced setup options for VT/HP, 3270, and
5250 emulations. These options are used to customize keyboard, display, scanner,
timer, alarm, and printer operation.
•= Chapter six describes how to use the Twin Client advanced integration tools to
further customize terminal operation. The creation and use of mapping, macro,
dialog, and scanner control objects are described.
•= Chapter seven describes the use of the built-in Twin Client Formatter, and how to
configure the portable terminal to use screen formatting.
•= Chapter eight describes how to use the Airloader Auto-Configuration tool to manage
and automatically maintain the software configuration of all terminals on the
wireless network. Also described are software management procedures and options
that are unique to Symbol terminals.
•= Chapter nine is a reference for the ISO 8859-1 and ASCII character sets.
•= Chapter ten is a reference for the default keyboard configurations for Symbol
terminals using Twin Client in advanced mode. Figures and tables are included for
3270, 5250, and VT/HP. Included are Symbol terminal control sequences.
•= Chapter eleven contains a reference for error message resolution in Twin Client.
•= Chapter twelve is a guide to AirBEAM operation.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
1-5
Introduction
This page is intentionally blank.
1-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 2 • Installation
This chapter describes the installation of the Twin Client software on a Windows 95, 98,
ME, XP, NT/2000, or 2003 PC. The software can be downloaded from the Connect web
site. Instructions are provided in the Downloading from the WEB section below.
Requirements
Installation of Twin Client requires, at a minimum, the following:
•= A Pentium-class processor
•= 32 MB of RAM
•= 10 MB of free hard disk space available
•= Microsoft Windows 95, 98, ME, XP, NT/2000, or 2003 operating system
Downloading From the WEB
1. Go to http://www.connectrf.com on the Partner Services page.
2. Click on the Software Download icon.
3. Select the applicable Twin Client Manager software.
4. Click on the Version number to download software.
5. Click on Setup.exe and follow Installation Shield wizard.
6. Follow the steps in the Authorizing Twin Client section of Chapter 4.
Running Setup from a Download File
The downloaded file is a compressed archive. After extraction using a utility such as
WinZip or PKWARE, folders are created on the hard disk as shown in the following
figure.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
2-1
Installation
Click on the Disk1 folder to view the files as shown in the following figure.
Click on the Setup application and proceed to the following section entitled Installation
for further instructions.
Installation
The InstallShield wizard runs and presents the following screen.
Click on Next to begin the installation process.
2-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Installation
To change the default Destination Location, click on Browse and select a location. Then
click on Next.
The default folder is Twin Client. This default may be changed either by selecting an
existing program group or by typing in a new name at the prompt. Then click on Next.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
2-3
Installation
Read the warning. Select Yes to continue with the installation, or No to close the setup.
When the installation is complete, reboot the system to initialize the Twin Client
software.
a. To reboot the system immediately, click on Finish.
b. To reboot later, click on the option to restart the computer later, and click on
Finish.
2-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Running the Manager
Running the Manager
The Twin Client Manager is the utility that manages the terminal software and
configurations. Select Start, Programs, PowerNet, and Twin Client Manager.
Note: If the PowerNet splash screen flashes for a second and ends when the Twin Client
manager is run, move the file at this link
(http://www.connectrf.com/Documents/fix-flash.reg) to the system with the
problem and then run it. This issue, found in earlier versions of the Twin Client
manager, has been fixed in later versions by using a later MS compiler and
libraries.
The Twin Client Manager screen appears as shown in the following figure. This is the
administrator's main screen, and all functions are accessed from its menu bar, tool bar,
and tabs.
Menu Bar
The menu bar provides access to the functions used to configure the terminals and
manage their software. Subsequent chapters of this manual explain each menu and its
options.
Toolbar
Under the menu bar, the tool bar provides shortcuts to major features. The toolbar can be
turned on or off by changing the Toolbar parameter found on the View menu. The
shortcuts available from the toolbar are as follows:
Create a new terminal configuration.
Open an existing terminal configuration.
Save the current terminal configuration.
Download the configuration to terminal.
Download software to terminal.
Automatically configure terminals over the wireless network.
Twin Client Manager version.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
2-5
Installation
The Twin Client Manager is now successfully installed and ready for use. The next
chapter provides detailed instructions for quickly configuring the terminal and starting a
Telnet session.
2-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 3 • Quick Start
This chapter describes how to prepare the Twin Client Manager and the Symbol terminal
for a Telnet session with the host. Following an initial serial download, the terminal
software and configuration is managed automatically, over the wireless network.
Note: Symbol terminals are normally delivered with Symbol files pre-installed.
However, if the terminal does not have those files installed refer to Chapter 8,
Downloading Symbol Files, before proceeding.
Configuring the Manager
The first step is to configure the Twin Client Manager to meet site-specific requirements,
and then prepare it for the automatic management of the terminal software and IP
addresses. This simple procedure will require only a few minutes to complete.
Setting the Emulation
Click on Start, Programs, PowerNet, and Twin Client Manager. Select the Settings
menu, as shown below.
Click on Emulation, select the desired emulation, then click OK.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
3-1
Quick Start
Setting the Servers
The Servers are the Telnet host systems the terminals will access.
To set these addresses from the Settings menu, click on Servers.
Click on Add. Enter the Server name, IP Address, IP Port (normally 23 for Telnet
servers), and Terminal type. Use the Load button if you want to load an .svr file. Use the
Save As button if you want to save your file as an .svr file.
Then click on OK. Repeat this step for each Telnet server the terminals are required to
access.
3-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Configuring the Manager
On CE terminals it's possible to use DNS (Domain Name System) lookup to determine
the host address. To set this up, key in the full DNS name in the "Server Name" field and
set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
Note: Some DOS terminals also support DNS host lookup. You can determine if your
device supports this by looking for the presence of a DNS setup option under
"Terminal Setup" (Shift C).
When the client sees the address of 0.0.0.0, it will issue a DNS lookup on the value in the
"Server Name" field to determine the true IP address.
Please make sure that you have DNS set up on the terminal. On CE terminals, use the
control panel. On DOS terminals, use the Shift C menu.
You can also "Test" the DNS name lookup in Twin Client manager (if the Windows PC
is using the same DNS server as the RF terminal). Just click on the "Lookup" button and
the true IP will be returned in the IP address field.
Please make sure to set the address back to 0.0.0.0 before sending this to the terminal.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-3
Quick Start
Terminal AirLoader and AirBEAM Operations
In the Twin Client menu under Settings, choose Terminal Operation.
On a 3000 series terminal or a 7500 terminal, Run Airloader on terminal can be checked,
and the Airloader server IP address can be entered, as shown below. Click on OK.
On a CE terminal, Run Airloader on terminal can be selected, the Airloader server IP
address can be entered, and the Windows CE options of Run application at startup and
Hide task bar can be selected. Also, there is an option "Use GUI menus and screens" that
makes the terminal program act more "Windows-like". Click on OK.
See AirBEAM Operation at the end of this manual for instructions on the AirBEAM
option in this screen.
Setting Terminal Model and COM Port
The default terminal model is 3000s, and the default serial connection to the Symbol
cradle is through COM1. To select a specific Symbol terminal model and keypad, or to
change the COM port assignment, click on the Options menu as shown.
3-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Configuring the Manager
The default terminal model, 3000s, represents the default setup for all Symbol terminals
under Twin Client (refer to Chapter 9). To maintain compatibility with existing Symbol
Telnet client keyboard layouts, a specific terminal model and keypad must be selected
from the Terminal Model window.
Saving the Configuration
Click File, Save As, and enter a name for this configuration.
For the purposes of this example, the name is vt100.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-5
Quick Start
Setting Airloader Auto-Configuration
The configuration download and IP address assignment for each terminal will take place
automatically by setting the Airloader Auto-Configuration options.
Click on the Airloader option in the Tools menu.
Note: If the Airloader Auto-Configuration window does not display the options, click on
the Advanced<< button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the PC, ensure that the desired network
adapter is selected. The adapter selection can be changed by clicking on the Change
button.
3-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Configuring the Manager
This powerful software management tool is described in detail in Chapter 8. For now, it
is sufficient simply to use it for assignment of the initial terminal configuration and IP
address, all of which can be easily changed later. Ensure that all of the check boxes are
checked as shown above.
To assign terminal IP addresses automatically over the wireless network, check all of the
boxes as shown above. Then click on the Addresses button and enter the desired range
in the From and To boxes as shown in the following figure.
After setting the address range, click on OK to return to the Airloader AutoConfiguration screen and then click on the box next to the terminal group manager.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-7
Quick Start
The display expands to include the default terminal Group. Next, click on the New
Group icon and use the Browse button to select the configuration file saved earlier.
Check the Active box, and the system is now configured to automatically download IP
addresses, software, and configuration files to the terminals. The Schedule box brings up
a dialog box for scheduling an automatic Airloader update. Click on the box at upper
right corner to return to the main menu.
Note: The software does not need to be authorized now. It can be authorized later, after a
Telnet session has been established. The procedure is described in Chapter 4
section entitled Authorizing Twin Client.
3-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Configuring the Manager
Selecting the AirLoad File
The Twin Client Manager provides downloading to the terminal through the cradle, and
subsequently over the wireless network. Click on Terminal, then Send Program Files to
Terminal.
Selecting the AirLoader Hex File allows the emulation program to be downloaded
automatically after the terminal is cold-booted (as described in the next section). This
also allows for automatic assignment of the terminal IP address. The AirLoader hex file
itself is downloaded through the serial connection as described in the next section.
Click on OK and proceed to Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download Procedure,
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure, or Symbol CE Terminal Download
Procedure.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-9
Quick Start
Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download Procedure
Symbol terminals are delivered with system software and the radio driver pre-installed. If
they have not been installed refer to the section entitled Downloading Symbol Files
before proceeding.
The terminal is prepared for the addition of Twin Client by performing a command mode
boot, selecting the program loader on the terminal, erasing the EEPROM, and setting the
serial port parameters.
Connecting the Cradle
The terminal download requires a serial connection between the terminal and the PC
through a cradle. In preparation for this download perform the following:
•= Connect the selected serial port on the PC to the cradle with a null modem cable.
•= Verify that the cradle is powered on.
3-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download Procedure
Command Mode Boot
On the portable terminal, power the terminal Off, then boot the terminal using the key
sequence specific to the terminal model as shown in the following table:
Command Mode Boot Sequences
Following Power Off
Terminal Model & Keypad
314x, 35-key
614x, 35-key
314x, 46-key
354x, 47-key
384x, 46-key
684x, 46-key
104x, 27-key
Key Sequence
Hold Bksp and Shift keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release Bksp and Shift keys.
Hold F and I keys.
Press and release Power.
Release F and I keys.
Hold Enter and Func keys.
Press and release Power.
Release Enter and Func keys.
Hold A and D keys.
Press and release Power.
Release A and D keys.
394x
694x
Selecting Program Loader
Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow keys to select the Program Loader function. To
correct an input error, press Clear to return to the command mode menu.
COMMAND MODE
Select function
Program loader
Place the terminal in the cradle and press Enter to erase the EEPROM.
Setting Serial Communications Parameters
After the EEPROM has been erased, the following menu appears.
Comm Parameters
Baud
4 9600
Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow keys to select the communications parameters as
follows.
Baud
Data Bits
Parity
Flow Control
38400
8
None
None
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-11
Quick Start
The terminal then displays the following screen.
Comm Parameters
Start?
<ENT>
Note: If there are more terminals to download and a cradle that supports multiple
terminals is present, repeat the steps in this section for each terminal.
The terminal is now configured to accept a download from the PC.
Downloading the Hex File
Turn on the power to the terminals in the cradle, which should display the following
screen.
Comm Parameters
Start?
<ENT>
Then press Enter on the terminal and return to the Twin Client Manager to click on the
OK button. The following should be displayed on the terminal while the download is in
progress.
Program loader
Receiving:
The download requires approximately 2 minutes to complete, during which the following
is displayed on the Twin Client Manager PC. Note that the file size may vary.
Following a successful download a status code of 0000 is displayed on the terminal. Use
the following table of status codes to troubleshoot a download failure.
3-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
Status Code
0000
0002
0004
0008
0010
0020
0060
0080
0100
0200
0400
0600
0800
1000
2000
4000
Error
No Errors
Receive overrun
Receive framing
Receive parity
Programming voltage absent
DSR or CD not detected on open
Not enough power to program
ABORT key pressed
CD lost during session
Illegal Intel hex record
Unsupported Intel hex record
Address out of range
NVM did not program correctly
NVM EEPROM failed to erase
Receive time-out error
Control start character time-out
CTS inactive time-out
Receive buffer full
In the event of a failure, verify the following:
•= The null modem cable connection between terminal and PC and condition of all
connectors.
•= The specification of correct COM port.
•= The correct cradle power supply.
•= The blinking of the charging light on the cradle, indicating proper seating of terminal
in cradle.
Note: To change emulations with Airload:
1. Go to the DOS prompt at the e:/ drive.
2. Type “cleartnt” and press the Enter key.
3. Set up Airload for the new emulation (example:
C:\PowerNet\TwinClient\3270.cf) in the configuration file box of the Airloader
auto-configuration screen.
4. Reboot the terminal (see the Cold Booting the Terminal section).
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
Symbol 7000 series terminals may have the radio drivers pre-installed. If the radio
drivers have not been installed, follow the preceding download procedures. After the
radio drivers have been installed, choose either AirLoader or Standard download.
Note: This is required of your terminal does not have the Symbol radio drivers pre-
installed.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-13
Quick Start
Symbol Radio Driver Installation Process
Command Mode Boot Sequence
Following Power OFF
Terminal Model and Keypad
7500 Series
Key Sequence
Press and Hold the Power button and the
Scan button, Wait for a Beep, and Release.
Note: If the first option on the startup menu is Scanning Demo, or you see menu options
regarding the IRDA port, then you must load radio drivers onto the terminal.
Terminal Model and Port Settings
From the Twin Client Manager, click on Settings, select Options, and click on 7500
from the Terminal Model window.
Click on Terminal, and Send Program Files to Terminal.
Select Custom Hex File and radio.hex. DO NOT click OK.
3-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
From the terminal, select 115200 for baud rate. Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow
keys to select the communication parameters as follows.
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
Select Single Image, put the terminal in the cradle, and press Enter.
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
From the Twin Client Manager, click the OK button.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-15
Quick Start
After the file transfer is completed, select Prev Menu on the terminal and press Enter.
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
Select Run System on the terminal to restart.
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
Run Config_11 on your terminal. The terminal may boot into Config_11 or the terminal
may need to run Config_11 from the startup menu. Enter your ESS ID and TCP/IP
parameters including IP address, subnet, and router, and then Exit. Proceed with either
the AirLoader or the Standard Hex file download.
Note: The 7540 (and 6140) Symbol terminal supports only upper case letters. Change all
ESS id's in the access point and existing terminals accordingly when adding these
terminals to existing Symbol sites that have specified their ESS id in lower case.
3-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
AirLoader Installation Procedure
The AirLoader hex file prepares the terminal to receive the Twin Client emulation
program and configuration files via the RF network. This powerful tool greatly
minimizes the amount of time spent configuring terminals. Once this hex file has been
installed on the terminal, the terminal will connect to the AirLoader Server to download
the required program and configuration files. This also allows for the automatic
assignment of the terminal IP address. The AirLoader hex file itself is downloaded
through the serial connection.
Command Mode Boot Sequence
Following Power OFF
Terminal Model and Keypad
7500 Series
Key Sequence
Press and Hold the Power button and the Scan
button, Wait for a Beep, and Release.
Click on Terminal, then on Send Program Files to Terminal.
Select Airloader Hex File. DO NOT click OK.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-17
Quick Start
From the terminal, select 115200 for baud rate. Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow
keys to select the communications parameters as follows.
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
Select Single Image, put the terminal in the cradle, and press Enter.
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
From the Twin Client Manager, click the OK button.
After the file transfer completes, select Prev Menu on the terminal and press Enter.
3-18
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
Select Run System on the terminal to restart.
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
On the terminal, do the following:
a. Select option 3 to get a dos prompt.
b. Enter d:/tntload to restart in Twin Client mode. The terminal’s program and
configuration files will be updated and the terminal will reboot.
Note: To switch emulators after installation, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
At the Twin Client ‘Any Key’ prompt, enter an uppercase C.
At the Setup menu, press [Ctrl-C] and terminate the batch job.
At the d: prompt, enter oldstart.
Reboot the terminal and repeat the steps above to download the AirLoader Hex
File or a Standard Serial Hex File.
or
1. Go to the DOS prompt at the d:/ drive.
2. Delete the current emulation executable and the run.bat file.
3. Set up Airload for the new emulation (example: C:\PowerNet\TwinClient\3270.cf)
in the configuration file box of the airloader auto-configuration screen.
4. Reboot the terminal as follows. Press and hold the Power and Scan keys. Wait
for a beep. Release the keys).
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-19
Quick Start
Symbol 7500 Serial Standard Hex File Installation
The Standard Hex file includes the Twin Client emulation program files but does not
include the custom configuration files. Once this hex file has been installed on the
terminal, download the configuration files via a serial connection. See the Downloading
Symbol Files section for instructions on downloading configuration files.
Twin Client Terminal Installation
Command Mode Boot Sequence
Following Power OFF
Terminal Model and Keypad
7500 Series
Key Sequence
Press and Hold the Power button and the
Scan button, Wait for a Beep, and Release.
Click on Terminal, and then on Send Program Files to Terminal.
Select Standard Hex File. DO NOT click OK.
From the terminal, select 115200 for baud rate. Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow
keys to select the communications parameters as follows.
3-20
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
Select Single Image, put the terminal in the cradle, and press Enter.
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
From the Twin Client Manager, click the OK button.
After the file transfer completes, select Prev Menu on the terminal and then press Enter.
Prev Menu
Single Image
Multiple Images
BIOS
896k C:
960 D:
EXEC
IPL
ENTER
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-21
Quick Start
Select Run System on the terminal to restart.
Baud Rate
Run System
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Enter
On the terminal, do the following:
a. Select option 7 to get a dos prompt.
b. Enter d:\modstart to restart in Twin Client mode.
Symbol CE Terminal Download Procedure
The following download procedure is for Symbol 2840, 7940, 8040, 8140, 8840, 8940,
and 9000 terminals.
The terminal download requires a serial connection between the terminal and the PC
through a cable. In preparation for this download, connect the cable to the selected serial
port on the PC and to the terminal.
On the terminal, select Start, and choose Programs from the drop-down menu.
Press the Connection icon, and then the ActiveSync icon.
On the PC, click on Twin Client Manager from under Start, Programs, and PowerNet.
Under the Terminal menu, choose Send Program Files to Terminal, as shown in the
following screen.
The following screen is displayed.
Choose Yes at the prompt. The following screen is displayed.
3-22
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Cold Booting the Terminal
Click on OK.
The PC is now configured to download to the terminal.
Cold Booting the Terminal
Following a successful AirLoad hex file download, and at any time it is necessary to
update the terminal software and/or configuration, the 3000 series terminal must be coldbooted. Use the following table to identify the required key sequence for specific
terminal models.
Cold Boot Sequence
Following Power Off
Terminal Model & Keypad
314x, 35-key
614x, 35-key
314x, 46-key
354x, 47-key
384x, 46-key
684x, 46-key
104x, 27-key
394x, 54-key
694x, 54-key
Key Sequence
Hold Space, Func and Up-Arrow keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release Space, Func and Up-Arrow keys.
Hold down A, B and D keys.
Press and release Power.
Release A, B and D keys.
Hold Right-Arrow and Enter keys.
Press and release Power.
Release Right-Arrow and Enter keys.
Hold F1, F4 and Enter keys.
Press and release Power.
Release F1, F4 and Enter keys.
The completion of the cold boot is indicated by the following terminal display.
LOAD EMULATOR USING
1 - AirLoad
2 - Serial Download
Note: To minimize download time, remove the terminal from the cradle.
Enter 1 to continue. Option 2 is used for custom download options and is described in
Downloading Symbol Files.
The terminal then associates with an access point, contacts the Twin Client Manager, and
then downloads the program, configuration, and IP address of the terminal.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-23
Quick Start
During the download, progress messages are displayed on the terminal. Pauses in activity
of up to 10 seconds will be observed as the terminal writes to EEPROM (This does not
apply to Symbol CE terminals). The download requires approximately 2 minutes to
complete.
The following table describes the error messages that will be displayed on the terminal in
the event of a download failure, and can be used as a guide to correcting the problem.
Error
Indication
NOT
Associated
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Invalid NETID or
ESSID
No AirLoad
Manager
Found
AirLoad Manager
not active, or not
installed on the
LAN segment
Manager
not Active
Previously
identified AirLoad
Manager is no
longer found.
IP stack on
terminal failed to
load.
Transient
communications
failure
Socket closed
during download
PC not operating
Run CFG24 or CFG11 (or current Symbol
radio setup program) and set NETID or
ESSID to match the access point. See
Terminal Setup Using Twin Client Menus.
Ensure that the PC with Twin Client
Manager is on the same segment and that
the PC is operating. If the PC is not on the
same segment, enter the address of the
PC in response to the terminal prompt.
Same as above.
Unable to
open
connection
Timeout
waiting for
data
Download
aborted
Manager
inactive
Reload Symbol driver files.
Reboot terminal. If problem persists,
check the RFSYNC.log in the
TwinClientTN directory.
Ensure PC is operating. Reboot terminal
and retry.
Restart the PC.
After taking the corrective action, the terminal must be cold booted again. A successful
wireless connection and download is indicated by the display of the Twin Client main
menu shown below.
Twin Client
© 1991-2004, Connect, Inc.
Keypress to Continue
The terminal is now ready to establish a Telnet session with the host system.
3-24
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Starting a Telnet Session
Starting a Telnet Session
At the Twin Client main menu on the terminal, press any key to establish the connection.
Until the terminal has been authorized, the following screen is displayed.
RECOVERABLE ERROR
Terminal not
Authorized for
Twin Client
Keypress to Continue
It is not necessary to authorize the terminal at this time, so press any key to continue. The
terminal will establish a connection with the host system and start emulation. If the
terminal fails to connect to the host, refer to the following table for the possible causes
and the related corrective actions.
Failure Cause
Incorrect Host IP
address
Incorrect netmask
value
Corrective Action
Correct the Host List address on the terminal. Refer to
Terminal Setup Using Twin Client Menus.
Access Radio Setup menu and correct the netmask
value. Refer to Terminal Setup Using Twin Client
Menus.
After a Telnet session has been successfully established, the terminal will remain in
session for a maximum of 30 minutes at a time until it has been authorized. Once
authorized, there is no software restriction the session time. The instructions for
authorizing the terminal are presented in Authorizing Twin Client.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3-25
Quick Start
This page is intentionally blank.
3-26
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 4 • Standard Setup
The default terminal setup is sufficient for most installations. However, to meet sitespecific requirements it may be necessary to customize terminal operation. Standard
Setup is selected by choosing the Standard option from the View menu in Twin Client
manager. The standard setup options simplify this process and can be modified using any
one of the following methods:
•= Using the Twin Client Manager.
•= Using the Twin Client terminal menu system.
•= Using the Symbol-style terminal menu system.
•= Using Symbol-style configuration barcodes.
To simplify the task for experienced Symbol installers, the standard setup options of both
the Twin Client Manager and the terminal menu system match those of other Symbol
products. As an additional conversion aid, customized Symbol configuration files can be
imported and automatically converted to Twin Client.
This chapter describes how to use the Twin Client Manager, the terminal menu systems,
barcodes to setup the terminal, and the methods for authorizing the terminal software.
Setup Using Twin Client Manager
The Twin Client Manager provides a Standard Settings tab for automatic setup of the
terminals. The options within this tab vary according to the emulation selected, each of
which is described below.
VT and HP Settings
Select the VT and HP emulation setup by clicking on the Settings menu and then the
Emulation menu, as shown below. Click on Standard under the View menu to access
the Standard Settings tab.
Then click on the VT100, VT220, or HP700 selection, as shown below.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
4-1
Standard Setup
Click on OK after the selection is made, and return to the main Twin Client Manager
menu. The standard settings tab will now reflect the settings for VT/HP emulation.
Auto Logon
This check box enables (checked) and disables (unchecked) the scanning of text entered
in the “Scan for” box and the sending of text entered in the “Send” box for the user ID.
Send Password
This check box enables (checked) and disables (unchecked) the scanning of text entered
in the “Scan for” box and the sending of text entered in the “Send” box for passwords.
4-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Setup Using Twin Client Manager
Local Echo
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the local echoing of keyboard
and scanner input on the terminal. This option can be enabled for host systems that do
not echo terminal input. The default setting is disabled.
Map Underline as Reverse
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the mapping of the underline
display attribute to the reverse video display attribute. The default setting is disabled.
Printer Type
This scrolling list selects the attached printer type. The default value is none, indicating
no printer is attached.
Control Codes
This button menu selects 7-bit (default) or 8-bit emulation control codes.
Backspace Sends
This button menu selects the control code sent by the Backspace key. The default
setting is Backspace.
5250 Settings
Select the 5250 emulation setup by clicking on the Settings menu and then the
Emulation menu, as shown below.
Then click on the 5250 selection, as shown below.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-3
Standard Setup
Click on OK after the selection is made, and return to the main Twin Client Manager
menu. The standard settings tab will now reflect the settings for 5250 emulation.
Backlight Time
This numeric input field determines the time, in seconds, that the backlight remains on
after keyboard activity. The default value is 5 seconds. Setting the value to zero (0)
disables the backlight.
Double High and Double Wide Font
These check boxes enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the display of characters in
double high and double wide font.
Reset
This button menu defines the behavior of the Reset key. Selecting On Errors Only
prompts the user to press the key whenever a 5250 error condition is present. Selecting
Automatic forces the automatic generation of a reset key in response to all 5250 error
conditions, and selecting On All Messages prompts the user to press the key whenever a
message is present on the 5250 error line. The default is On Errors Only.
4-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Setup Using Twin Client Manager
Disable Data Ids
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the processing of data
identifiers embedded in barcodes. Data identifiers are used to associate scanned data
automatically with specific 5250 input fields, and can be implemented by either of the
following two methods:
By one method, the host application display must have the matching identifier, enclosed
in parentheses, in the protected area immediately preceding the input field, and the
barcode must begin with the same identification characters but without the parentheses.
By the alternate method, the protected area of the host screen must contain a backslash
followed by a single character (see table below) immediately preceding the input field. In
this case, the barcode is identified by symbology and no special characters are added to
the barcode.
Identifier
\A
\B
\C
\D
\E
\F
\G
Symbology
Any symbology
UPCE 0
UPC 1
UPC A
MSI
EAN 8
EAN 13
Identifier
\H
\I
\J
\K
\L
\M
\N
Symbology
Codabar
Code 3 of 9
D2 of 5
I2 of 5
Code 11
Code 93
Code 128
Beeper Option Group
These numeric input options define the behavior of the terminal's audible alarm. Setting
the number of beeps to zero (0), which is the default, disables the alarm.
Reprint Option
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the display of a reprint option
on the terminal after each print operation. The default is enabled.
Printer Type
This scrolling list selects the attached printer type. The default value is none, indicating
no printer is attached.
Swap Field Exit and Enter Keys
This check box swaps the meaning of the Fexit and Enter keys on the terminal keyboard.
The default value is unchecked (not swapped).
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-5
Standard Setup
3270 Settings
Select the 3270 emulation setup by clicking on the Settings menu and then the
Emulation menu, as shown below.
Then click on the 3270 selection, as shown below.
Click on OK after the selection is made, and return to the main Twin Client Manager
menu. The standard settings tab will now reflect the settings for 3270 emulation.
4-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Setup Using Twin Client Manager
Backlight Time
This numeric input field determines the time, in seconds, that the backlight remains on
after keyboard activity. The default value is 5 seconds. Setting the value to zero (0)
disables the backlight.
Double High and Double Wide Font
These check boxes enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the display of characters in
the double-high and double-wide fonts.
Disable Data Ids
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the processing of data
identifiers embedded in barcodes. Data identifiers are used to associate scanned data
automatically with specific input fields, and can be implemented by either of the
following two methods:
By one method, the host application display must have the matching identifier, enclosed
in parentheses, in the protected area immediately preceding the input field, and the
barcode must begin with the same identification characters but without the parentheses.
By the alternate method, the protected area of the host screen must contain a backslash
followed by a single character (see table below) immediately preceding the input field. In
this case, the barcode is identified by symbology and no special characters are added to
the barcode.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-7
Standard Setup
Identifier
\A
\B
\C
\D
\E
\F
\G
Symbology
Any symbology
UPCE 0
UPC 1
UPC A
MSI
EAN 8
EAN 13
Identifier
\H
\I
\J
\K
\L
\M
\N
Symbology
Codabar
Code 3 of 9
D2 of 5
I2 of 5
Code 11
Code 93
Code 128
Beeper Option Group
These numeric input options define the behavior of the terminals audible alarm. Setting
the number of beeps to zero (0), which is the default, disables the audible alarm.
Reprint Option
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the display of a reprint option
on the terminal after each print operation. The default is enabled.
Printer Type
This scrolling list selects the attached printer type. The default value is none, indicating
no printer is attached.
Importing Custom Configurations
Existing installations that use a custom Symbol configuration file are easily converted to
Twin Client with the Import option found under the File tab of Twin Client Manager.
Click on Import, and if necessary then click on the Browse button to locate the file.
4-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Terminal Setup Using Symbol-Style Barcodes
To further simplify conversion, the import utility displays all conversion errors and
warnings so that potential compatibility problems can be easily identified and corrected.
Note: For the 2840, 3000 series (10x0, 31x0, 35x0, 38x0, 39x0, 40x0, 61x0, 68x0,
69x0), 7940, and 8140 terminals, importing ROI configuration files works with
Wavelink in release 7 or earlier, provided that the Wavelink client is using the
term.cfg file.
Terminal Setup Using Symbol-Style Barcodes
The Twin Client terminal software for Symbol recognizes the same configuration
barcodes used by the Symbol Telnet Client product. Refer to the associated Symbol
documentation for instructions.
Terminal Setup Using Symbol-Style Menus
To simplify the upgrade from Symbol Telnet Client products to Twin Client, the Twin
Client supports the same menu system. The Symbol-style configuration sub-menus are
accessed from the Twin Client main terminal screen shown below.
Twin Client
© 1991-2004, Connect, Inc.
Keypress to Continue
The following table describes the key sequences used to access each of the Symbol-style
configuration menus.
VTXX/HP Setup
Terminal Config
Config Host
Fnc, Ctl, and t
Fnc, Ctl, and c
Fnc, Ctl, and r
no password required
password: config
password: system
To quit, press the <q> key. To close the session, press the <Fnc>+<x> keys.
Note: The information on terminal setup using Symbol-style menus does not apply to
Symbol’s CE terminals.
The keystrokes, menus, and options are identical to those found in the Symbol product.
Refer to the Symbol Telnet Client product documentation for instructions.
Terminal Setup Using Twin Client Menus
For compatibility with other products, the Twin Client for Symbol also supports the
standard Twin Client configuration menu system on the terminal. This menu system is
accessed by pressing Shift and C at the Twin Client main menu shown below.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-9
Standard Setup
Twin Client
© 1991-2004, Connect, Inc.
Keypress to Continue
The following menu, which is specific to the Twin Client for Symbol, is displayed.
SETUP
1 - Radio Setup
2 - Terminal Setup
To return to the main menu from this menu, press Q. To make a menu selection, enter
the number next to the menu option. The Radio Setup option invokes CFG24 (or the
current Symbol radio setup program) to access to the radio network parameters, which
includes the terminal IP address and subnet mask. The Clear key terminates the Radio
Setup program, after which the terminal reboots and returns to the main menu.
The Terminal Setup option invokes the following menu.
Edit Functions
Edit Host List
Edit Authorization
Switch Modes
Run Emulator
Exit
Use the Up-Arrow and Down-Arrow keys to navigate the menu, and press Enter to select
the highlighted option. Each menu option is described in the following sections.
Editing the Host List
If the host IP address or addresses were not pre-configured as described earlier in the
section Setting the Servers, or if you wish to change those settings using the terminal
menus, select Edit Host List and enter up to four Host IP addresses as required.
Host 0
IP 206.183.67.155
Port 23__
<F3> Save <F7> Quit
Press FNC and 3 to save the configurations.
Editing the Authorization
The client software can be authorized automatically, as described in the next section.
This menu option permits authorization of each terminal manually. Select Edit
Authorization to obtain the terminal's Identification Code, which is then used to obtain
the Authorization code from the Connect web site as described in the next section.
The 12-digit value displayed at the top of the terminal screen is the Identification Code
for the terminal.
4-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Authorizing Twin Client
00A0F826E614
Authorization
______________
not authorized
<F3> Save <F7> Quit
Type the authorization code into the field as it appears on the WEB site. Punctuation
characters, such as the hyphen (-), are required. Press FNC and 3 to save the
authorization code.
Switching Modes
The Twin Client normally operates in Telnet mode, which provides direct connection to
Telnet hosts. It can also operate in Server mode, through an OpenAir server. Select the
Switch Modes menu option to switch between Server and Telnet modes of operation.
Note that the host socket address for the OpenAir servers is 1800, which must also be
changed in the Edit Host List menu described at the beginning of this section.
Running the Emulator
After all desired changes have been made, select the Run Emulator option to return to
the Twin Client main menu. Then press any key to establish the Telnet session and begin
emulation. Refer to the Chapter 3 sub-section, Starting a Telnet Session, for further
instructions.
Authorizing Twin Client
Each PowerNet Twin Client will run for 30 minutes at a time without authorization.
Uninterrupted operation for a production environment is the result of authorizing the
software.
The Twin Client Manager can automatically authorize the terminal over the wireless
network if the following requirements are met:
•= A PC running Twin Client Manager is connected to the wire LAN segment with at
least one access point within range of the terminal.
•= The AirLoad HEX file is installed on the terminal.
•= The System ID of the PC on which Twin Client Manager is installed has been used
to obtain a site license Authorization code from the Connect web site.
To obtain the System ID of the Twin Client Manager, click on the Authorization option
in the Tools menu, as shown below.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-11
Standard Setup
The Authorization window is displayed as shown below.
Go to http://www.connectrf.com. Click on Partner Services. Click on the Generate
Authorization icon at the top of the page. Follow the directions on the web site.
Authorized Terminals
The number of terminals authorized, the number of terminals in use, and the number of
terminals remaining is provided in the Authorized Terminals box on the lower left side
of the screen.
Click on the Details button to number the options in the screen below in the order of
your priority.
Note: The terminal may or may not be able to utilize the Formatter feature depending on
its authorization codes.
4-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Authorizing Twin Client
Click on an option and move it using the Up and Down buttons.
Click on OK when finished.
The Manual Authorization button is an alternate method of obtaining an authorization
code for a terminal. This method does not utilize Airloader, as does the other method.
Click on this button, manually enter your mac address in the screen that appears, and
click on OK. This enables you to generate individual authorization codes.
Add Licenses
The Add Licenses feature is used when adding additional licenses to an already site
licensed Twin Client manager.
An example of this is the instance in which Twin Client manager is licensed for 10
licenses, and the customer purchases another 10 licenses to make a total of 20 licenses.
From Twin Client manager, choose Authorization from under the Tools menu.
Click on the Add Licenses button.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-13
Standard Setup
A pop-up box appears with the machine ID and a space for the additional licenses
authorization code.
Enter the additional license’s authorization code and click on OK.
Use the machine ID in the pop-up box instead of the original machine ID to get your
authorization code.
If adding users, click on the Add Licenses button before generating the authorization
code to get the most current machine ID.
4-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Authorizing Twin Client
Transfer Authorization
The Transfer Authorization feature is used when moving a site license from one PC to
another.
After Twin Client manager is installed on a new PC, you will need the system/machine
ID for it. This ID appears in the first box of the authorization screen.
From Twin Client manager, select Authorization from under the Tools menu.
Click on the Transfer Authorization button on the old PC.
You will be asked for the new system ID. Enter this new system ID. It will generate an
authorization code for the new PC's Twin Client manager.
Note: This feature only works if there are licenses remaining on the old PC.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
4-15
Standard Setup
Listing
Click on the Listing button to view authorization codes issued.
The authorization codes used along with their corresponding serial numbers will appear.
Click on OK when finished.
Click on the Close button when finished.
4-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 5 • Advanced Setup
The Twin Client permits the customization of all aspects of terminal operation without
custom programming. This chapter describes all of the advanced setup options.
Additional advanced customization features, such as Object Editors, are described in
Chapter 6.
Experienced Symbol installers accustomed to performing customizations by manuallyediting the Symbol Telnet client configuration file will find this interface easier to use.
However, those that prefer the file editing method can still do so, and still achieve the
same result, by using the Import option described in the previous chapter.
Selecting the Advanced Setup
To change to the Advanced mode, click on the View menu and then on Advanced.
As a result, a new set of tabs is displayed, as shown below.
The following sections in this chapter describe each of the tabs and the options within
each tab.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
5-1
Advanced Setup
Customizing the Keyboard
Clicking on the Keyboard tab displays the setup options related to the terminal keyboard
and its operation.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
End Key
This scrolling list selection is used to set the terminal key that terminates both the host
connection and the wireless session.
Auto Send Key
This scrolling list selection is used to set the keystroke to be sent automatically by the
terminal when an input field on the terminal is filled with keyed input. That is, if an input
field is 9 characters long, and 9 characters are manually keyed into the field, the Auto
Send key is automatically transmitted with the 9 characters. Selecting noop disables this
feature.
Note: Selecting the Length Check option on the Scanner tab disables the Auto Send Key.
5-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing the Keyboard
Key Click
This check box enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) audible key clicks from the
terminal.
Note: The option to turn on key clicks in TwinClient does not function in a Windows CE
environment. The key clicks are controlled by Windows CE directly; there is no
API under CE for turning key clicks on and off. Key clicks may be turned on in
Settings / Sounds & Reminders from the Windows CE OS.
Case Conversion
This scrolling list selection allows automatic conversion of keyed input to upper or lower
case. The none value means that no conversion takes place.
Mapping Object
This feature of Twin Client allows for custom keyboard development. For example, the
Tab key can changed to generate a PF4. This is an advanced integration tool and its use
is described in Chapter 6.
Macro Object (VT/HP emulation only)
This feature is used to assign a key sequence to a specific terminal key. For example, the
PF1 key can be set to generate a character string sequence such as receiving. This is an
advanced integration tool and its use is described in Chapter 6.
Mode (VT/HP emulation only)
This scrolling list selection controls the transmission characteristics of the VT/HP
emulations. In char mode, each keystroke generates an individual transmission. In block
mode, a transmission takes place only after a control key, such as Enter or a PF key, is
depressed. The block mode is more efficient. Refer to Chapter 6, Advanced Display
Options for VT/HP, for more details on setting block mode operation.
Note: When set to char mode, the Collection timer value in the Timers tab should be set
to between 30 and 50 milliseconds for maximum performance.
Auto EOF (3270 emulation only)
This check box option enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the automatic erasure
of all data in a field prior to keyed or scanned data input.
Clear First (3270 emulation only)
This check box option enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the automatic erasure
of all data in a field prior to keyed or scanned data input.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-3
Advanced Setup
Serial Input (7500 terminal only)
This check box option enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the viewing of the
terminal screen in hyperterminal.
Advanced (3270 emulation only)
Clicking the Advanced button brings up the Advanced 3270 Keyboard screen and
provides a variety of special key generation options. This is an advanced integration tool
and its use is described in Chapter 6.
Customizing the Display
Clicking on the Display tab shows the options related to the terminal display and its
operation.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
5-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing the Display
Quadrant Mode
This scrolling list option defines the rules by which the terminal display is positioned in
the larger host display. As defined by Twin Client, quadrants are fixed position
"windows" in the host display, and the terminal display is located on whatever quadrant
contains the current cursor position.
=
Off disables quadrant processing and Twin Client simply centers the current host
=
On enables quadrant processing. However, input fields that cross quadrant
boundaries result in a shift to the left in order to locate as much of the current input
field on the terminal display.
=
Soft always positions on a quadrant boundary regardless of input field boundaries.
input field in the terminal display.
Viewing keys are enabled.
=
Hard is the same as Soft except the viewing keys are disabled.
=
Lock locks the terminal display origin (upper left corner) to fixed row and column
(x,y) coordinates in the host display. The coordinates are zero-based.
Lock Row defines the Y coordinate for display position locking. Range is zero (0) to
maximum number of rows on the host screen.
Lock Column defines the X coordinate for display position locking. Range is zero (0) to
the maximum number of columns on the host screen.
Note: If you have selected Lock and data is received outside of the Lock zone, this
can cause the session to lock up.
Scroll Mode
This scrolling list option selects the rule used for moving the terminal display within the
host display using the viewing keys.
=
Half scrolls the terminal display in half-screen increments. For example, given a 16-
=
Full scrolls the terminal display in full screen increments. For example, given a 16column screen, the screen is scrolled left and right 16 columns at a time.
column screen, the screen is scrolled left and right 8 columns at a time.
Language
This scrolling list option selects the display character mapping and the translation table
used for error messages displayed on the terminal. The file umsgs.txt, which is installed
with Twin Client, contains all of the current language translations.
In the event a specific language is not translated, or if a specific message is not correctly
translated, visit the Connect web site at http://www.connectrf.com and check the Support
page for a related Tech Note. If the issue has not been addressed, email
support@connectrf.com and request a Product Change Request (PCR).
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-5
Advanced Setup
Cursor Appearance
This scrolling list option selects the manner in which the cursor is displayed on the
terminal.
Type Appearance
soft Blinking Underscore (_)
hard Blinking Block hide None
Mapping Object
This feature is used to modify the displayed character set. This is an advanced
integration option and its use is described in Chapter 6.
Dialog Object
This feature is used to build session automation scripts, and is an advanced integration
option described in Chapter 6.
Formatting
This feature is used to re-format the host display onto the terminal display. This is an
advanced integration option and is described in Chapter 6.
Relocation Group
This option group allows rows of the host display to be relocated automatically. This
option is particularly useful when the application generates important error messages on
a specific row that is not necessarily within the terminal's display area.
Source
Defines the starting row (zero-based) in the host display that is relocated to the
destination row of the host display.
Destination
Defines the starting source row location (zero-based) in the host display.
Row Count
Specifies the number of host display rows to be relocated, starting with the row defined
by the Source option and continuing from top to bottom of the display. Zero (0) disables
row relocation.
Move Blank
This check box enables unconditional relocation (checked), or enables relocation only
when data is present on the source row or rows (unchecked).
5-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing the Display
Reverse Video
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the processing of the reverse
video display attribute on the terminal.
Wait Message
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the display of the message
Waiting for Data on the terminal display. This message is used to indicate that the
terminal has transmitted data to the host application and is waiting for a response.
Default Data (3270/5250 only)
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), editing of data present in the
current input field prior to entry of new data by the terminal operator.
Double High and Double Wide
These check boxes enable (checked), or disable (unchecked), the display of characters on
the terminal screen in double high and double wide fonts, respectively. On a CE
terminal, the double high and double wide check boxes are replaced with a font size
scrolling list box and a bold font check box.
Alt Scan Key
This scrolling list option within the formatter defines the control key automatically
transmitted with scanned data. The list of keys depends on the type of emulation in use.
The noop key indicates that no automatic control key will be sent.
Advanced Key (VT/HP only)
This is the key that will be sent automatically for the formatter feature when using VT
emulation to skip unformatted fields. Set this key to whatever is required by the
application to move from field to field. This will allow you to skip unneeded fields and
the formatter will automatically bypass them. This is not required for 3270 or 5250
emulation as there is a standard method for moving between fields.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-7
Advanced Setup
Customizing the Scanner
Clicking on the Scanner tab shows the options related to the terminal scanner and its
operation.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
Send Key
This scrolling list option defines the control key automatically transmitted with scanned
data. The list of keys depends on the type of emulation in use. The noop key indicates
that no automatic control key will be sent.
Scan Ahead
This scrolling list option defines the number of scans that can be transmitted by the
terminal without a response from the host system. The maximum is 24.
Set to 0, scan ahead is disabled and you cannot scan again until the host
response has been received.
Set to 1, there is no scan ahead limit.
Set to 2 and above, and the software will let you scan that many times
until a host response is received. So if you set it for 3, it will allow you to
scan only 2 more times before the host responds to the first scan.
5-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing the Scanner
Note: Use Scan Ahead with caution. It can cause the operation to get out of sync with the
application.
Length Check
With Length Check off, and Auto Enter key set to "noop": Keyed or scanned input
that is equal to or greater than the field length results in an error "Entry Too Long" and
no data is transmitted.
With Length Check off, and Auto Enter key set to anything other than "noop":
a. Keyed input equal to the field length: The data and the specified Auto Enter key are
transmitted.
b. Keyed input greater than field length: This is not possible, due to a) above.
c. Scanned input equal to or greater than the field length: The data is transmitted. If the
data is greater than the field length, then that data is distributed among the subsequent
input fields and the Scan Termination key is transmitted (unless it too is set to "noop").
With Length Check on: The Auto Enter key and its functionality are disabled for both
scanned and keyed input.
There are specific functionalities related to the various settings of length checking and
the Auto Enter key. Setting the Auto Enter key to "noop" disables the Auto Enter
function (i.e., automatic transmission of data when the field is filled or overfilled) for
both scanned and keyed input. When it is set to anything other than "noop", keyed and
scanned input is distinguished and the Auto Enter key is effective only for keyed input.
Scanned data that is equal to or greater than the field length is terminated with the Scan
Termination key instead of the Auto Enter key.
Note: Enabling Length Check disables the Truncation option (described below).
Truncation
This check box option enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the automatic
truncation of scanned data that is greater than the length of the input field. With both
Truncation and Length Checking disabled, oversized scans are automatically applied to
subsequent input fields as needed. If either option is enabled, this automatic application
is disabled.
Stripping
This scrolling list option controls the rule for automatically removing trailing spaces and
underscore characters. The rules are defined as follows:
Rule
off
space
score
both
Operation
No stripping is performed.
Trailing spaces are stripped.
Trailing underscores are stripped.
Both trailing spaces and underscores are stripped.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-9
Advanced Setup
Binary-128
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the processing of binary
code 128 bar codes on the terminal.
Caution: If this option is disabled and binary-128 barcodes are used, the results are
unpredictable.
Data Mapping, Data Editor, and Decoder Control
These are advanced integration tools and are described in Chapter 6.
Scanner Type
This scrolling list option defines the type of special scanner attachment in use, if present.
If you use AirLoader, you will be asked a one-time question if your 68xx terminal has a
1D or 2D scanner installed.
If you use the standard method of loading the terminal, there are new hex images that
have been included that have the 2D support built. Please follow the instructions below
for standard loaded terminals.
1D Scanner Support - Load the terminal as normal. When you select the pull down
"Terminal/Send Program files to Terminal" it will open the "Symbol HEX file Dialog
box". From here select the "Standard HEX file" option.
2D Scanner Support - From the same "Symbol HEX file" dialog box select "Custom
HEX file" option. Select the following file from the list to match the required emulation.
VT100/VT220/HP700
5250
3270
TNTVT-2D.HEX
TNT5250-2D.HEX
TNT3270-2D.HEX
Note: When you depress the Scan trigger on the 814x terminal, the scan beam does not
come on. There is a setting for IrCom that can cause the scanner not to function. If
you turn this off as follows, the scanner will function as expected.
Select "Start/Settings".
Select "Connections".
Double tap the Beam icon.
Uncheck the Click box for: "Receive all incoming beams and select discoverable
mode".
Boot the terminal by holding Func + End + Lamp keys.
5-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
External Scanner Setup
External Scanner Setup
RF terminals can be ordered with an Internal scanner or they can also support an external
scanner. The external scanner is connected to the bottom of the terminal through the
serial port. This requires the RS232 adapter be installed. The external scanner can be
made to work even if an internal scanner is present. However, scanner decoder controls
only apply to the internal scanner as we only have access to the internal decoder.
The external scanner must be a serial based scanner. These are scanners that have on
board decoder hardware/software and output their signals by normal RS232 signaling
methods. These external scanners are controlled by their respective manufacturer’s
program controls provided in the manual accompanying the scanner from the
manufacturer.
The following is an example of a setup for an RF terminal.
This is the order in which to set up the scanner.
1 - (SET RS-232C DEFAULTS)
2 - (SET ALL DEFAULTS)
3 - RS-232 HOST BAUD RATE (9600)
4 - RS-232 HOST PARITY (NONE)
5 - RS-232 HOST DATA TRANSMISSION FORMATS (<DATA><SUFFIX>)
6 - RS-232 HOST PREFIX/SUFFIX VALUES (SUFFIX)
7 - RS-232 HOST PREFIX/SUFFIX VALUES (<1><0><1><3>)
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-11
Advanced Setup
Setting Log Levels
The terminal maintains a logging facility that can be used by Technical Support and
Engineering to assist in problem resolution. These levels should always be set to zero
(0).
Note: The options on this tab will be ghosted out when a 3000s terminal is selected.
5-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing Timers
Customizing Timers
Clicking on the Timers tab shows the options related to the terminal timers, as shown
below.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
Timers Group
Radio
This numeric input field defines the length of time, in seconds, during which the terminal
activates the radio and waits for a response from the host application. After the time is
exceeded, an error message is displayed on the terminal.
Power
This numeric input field defines the length of the time, in seconds, after which inactivity
of the scanner, keyboard, or radio results in a power saving shutdown of the terminal.
Backlight
This numeric input field defines the length of time, in seconds, during which the
terminal’s display backlight remains on after keyboard or scanner input. When set to a
value other than 0, the terminal turns on the backlight for the amount of time specified.
Backlight use reduces battery life.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-13
Advanced Setup
Keepalive (3270/5250 only)
This option group circumvents host application connection timeouts by automatically
generating the selected keystroke when the terminal is inactive for the specified period of
time, in minutes.
Collection Timer (VT/HP only)
This scrolling list option specifies the number of milliseconds the terminal waits for
inactivity from the host before processing received data. This feature is useful in
situations where the application and network latency fragments host transmissions to the
terminal, and also when host applications generate intermediate displays that are not
used.
Note: For maximum performance, adjust the collection time to 30-50ms when Mode on
the Keyboard tab is set to char.
Customizing Alarms
Clicking on the Alarm tab shows the options related to the terminal alarm mechanisms,
as shown below.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
Mode
This scrolling list option defines the operation of the audible alarm and scanner light on
the terminal.
5-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing Alarms
•= Off disables the audible alarm.
•= Bell enables the audible alarm as a double beep.
•= Flash enables the scan indicator light as the alarm – no audible alarm sounds.
•= Both enables the double beep and the scan indicator light as the alarm.
•= Spec1 enables the audible alarm as a single beep.
•= Spec2 enables a single beep and the scan indicator light as the alarm.
Volume
This scrolling list option set the volume of the audible alarm.
Duration & Frequency
The next two options, duration and frequency, are used to make a distinction between
alarms and scan decode tones when the Mode is set to spec1 or spec2.
Duration
This numeric entry field defines the length of the alarm sound in milliseconds.
Frequency
This numeric entry field defines the frequency of the audible alarm in Hertz. Zero (0)
selects the terminal's factory-set default which is terminal model dependent.
Allow Multiple
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), multiple alarms in a single
host transmission.
Scan Duration & Frequency
The next two options, scan duration and frequency, relate to the tones generated when
the scan decoder successfully identifies a symbology.
Scan Duration
This numeric input field defines the duration of the tone generated by a successful scan
decode, in milliseconds.
Scan Frequency
This numeric entry field defines the frequency of the scan decode tone in Hertz. Zero (0)
selects the terminal's factory-set default which is terminal model dependent.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-15
Advanced Setup
By Attribute (3270 only)
This scrolling list entry defines how 3270 field attributes can be used to generate alarms.
The choices are off, pen for the light pen attribute, num for numeric attribute, hi for high
intensity attribute, and hal for high intensity and light pen attributes.
Protected
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the processing of the field
attribute into audible alarms for all protected fields on the display.
Unprotected
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the processing of the field
attribute into audible alarms for all unprotected fields on the display.
Alternate (5250 only)
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the conversion of a single
digit character at a specified row and column on the 5250 display into the corresponding
number of audible alarms.
Row
This numeric input field specifies the zero-based row number in the 5250 display of the
alternate alarm digit.
Column
This numeric input field specifies the zero-based row number in the 5250 display of the
alternate alarm digit.
5-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing Printers
Customizing Printers
Clicking on the Printer tab shows the options related to the terminal printer, as shown
below.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
Type
This scrolling list option defines the type of printer attached to the terminal. On a CE
terminal, this scrolling list option contains a list of baud rate options, as shown below.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-17
Advanced Setup
Init Object
This feature allows printer initialization commands to be sent to the terminal
immediately after the terminal establishes a session. This is an advanced integration tool
and is described in Chapter 6.
Flag Byte, Row, Column, and Clear Key (3270,5250 only)
This group of options provides 3270 and 5250 host application direct control over the
terminal printer. See the Start and End later in this section for an alternate method.
VT/HP applications rely on standard escape sequences for the printing function.
Flag Byte
This numeric input field is a decimal value that corresponds to the ASCII-converted
value of an EBCDIC character generated by the host application. When the Flag Byte is
set to a non-zero value, the terminal checks the host display for the value at the specified
row and column (see Flag Row and Flag Column below). If the Flag Byte is present, all
data in the display that follows the Flag Byte is routed directly to the printer, up to the
next occurrence of a Flag Byte value in the display or else the end of the display.
Flag Row
This numeric input field specifies the row (zero-based, range of 0 to23) where the Flag
Byte (defined above) is located.
Flag Column
This numeric input field specifies the column (zero-based, range of 0 to79) where the
Flag Byte (defined above) is located.
Clear Key
This scrolling list option defines the keystroke transmitted by the terminal after printing
has completed. Set the key to noop to disable transmission.
Start and End (3270 and 5250 only)
This option group provides the host application direct control over the terminal printer.
Start
Specifies a unique character sequence that, when encountered in the host display,
indicates that all subsequent characters up to but not including the End character
sequence are to be transmitted to the printer attached to the terminal. The blank value
indicates that this option is not in use.
Note:
5-18
The print data limit is 1.5 K.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Customizing Printers
End
Specifies a unique character sequence that terminates collection of data from the host
display area for transmission to the printer attached to the terminal. The blank value
indicates that this option is not in use.
Start and End Convert (3270/5250 only)
This option group provides for conversion of print data collected with the Start and End
option group from ASCII characters in hexadecimal format (0-9 and A-F) to binary. The
feature allows binary data that might otherwise interfere with the emulation to be
included in the display area. The host application generates the hexadecimal data.
Start Convert
Specifies a unique character sequence (ASCII-converted) within the print data collected
with Start and End options that indicates the subsequent character pairs are hexadecimal
values that are converted to binary. A blank value indicates that the option is not in use.
End Convert
Specifies a unique character sequence (ASCII-converted) that terminates binary
conversion. Blank indicates that this option is not in use.
LXE Option (3270/5250 only)
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked) the processing of print data
embedded in the datastream according to LXE printing rules.
Convert Flag Byte and Conversion (3270 only)
This option group defines the conversion of a single character (Convert Flag Byte) found
in the 3270 print data, to a printer control sequence defined by the Conversion scroll list.
Convert Flag Byte
This numeric input field defines an ASCII value, in decimal, that will be converted to a
printer control sequence as defined by the Conversion option. Zero (0) disables
conversion.
Conversion
Specifies what the Flag Byte is converted to. The options are crnl, cr, and nl which
represent ASCII carriage return new line, carriage return, and new line, respectively.
Note: There is a potential problem with printer support on Symbol 68xx terminals after
the unit is returned from repair. When attempting to print, you may get one or
more of the following symptoms: garbled printing, no print output, or a false
terminal complaint that the printer is not ready. Discuss options with your service
provider. We have found no effective work-around, and most cases will require
that the CPU be swapped with one that has the older "Light Pipe" style sensors.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
5-19
Advanced Setup
Miscellaneous Customizations
Clicking on the Misc tab shows the following options window.
Note: Select New from under the File menu to view default settings.
Extended Command Group (3270 and 5250 only)
This option group provides 3270 and 5250 host applications with the same extended
command set available to VT/HP applications. Refer to Chapter 6 for a detailed
description of the Extended Commands.
Start
Specifies a unique character sequence that, when encountered within the host display,
indicates that all subsequent characters up to but not including the End sequence, are to
be interpreted as an Extended Command. Blank indicates that the option is not in use.
End
Specifies a unique character sequence that terminates the Extended Command.
Data Stream Group (3270 only)
Send All MDT
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked) the transmission of all fields
with the MDT (Modified Data Tag) bit set. When disabled, only unprotected fields are
transmitted.
5-20
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Miscellaneous Customizations
Send NULL
This check box enables (checked), or disables (unchecked) the transmission of NULL
characters to the host system.
Note: For AS400 hosts, this option must be checked.
Enable TN3270E
If this box is checked, will negotiate using TN3270E rules (see RFC 2355).
If this box is unchecked, will NOT negotiate TN3270E and will use IBM 3278 Mod 2.
Answerback (VT/HP only)
This text input field defines the response returned to the host application when the
answerback command (as defined under VT/HP emulation) is received. If this value is
left blank, the terminal automatically returns an ASCII string corresponding to the
emulation in use (vt100, vt220, or hp700).
Non-graphic characters may be embedded in the answerback field using the escape
sequence \nnn , where the backslash is followed by three digits representing the octal
value. Refer to Chapter 9, ASCII Character Set Octal Values.
$1 = terminal number. IP terminals = last two octets of the IP address.
Spectrum One = 065-511
$M = 4 character terminal model number (i.e., "6840")
Inserting the sequences “$A”, “$B”, “$C”, and “$D” into the answerback string results in
a substitution of four octets, three octets, two octets, and the last octet of the terminal IP
address, respectively, as shown below.
$A - all four octets of the IP address (206.183.067.226)
$B - the last 3 octets (183.067.226)
$C - the last 2 octets (067.226)
$D - the last octet (226)
Given a terminal with an IP address of 206.183.67.226, the following examples
demonstrate how substitution and non-graphic escape sequences are processed.
Answerback
Hello World
$A
RF$A
RF$A\015
$B
RF$B
RF$B\015
$C
RF$C
RF$C\015
$D
RF$D
RF$D\015
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Data Sent in Response to Answerback Command
Hello World
206.183.067.226
RF206.183.067.226
RF206.183.067.226<carriage return>
183.067.226
RF183.067.226
RF183.067.226<carriage return>
067.226
RF067.226
RF067.226<carriage return>
226
RF226
RF226<carriage return>
5-21
Advanced Setup
This page is intentionally blank.
5-22
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 6 • Advanced Integration
This chapter describes the use of the advanced integration features built in to the Twin
Client. These features make it possible to tailor Twin Client operation to meet special
customer requirements without custom programming.
Integration objects are used to implement the Twin Client advanced integration
capability. An editor is used to create and modify each object, and the objects are
associated with a terminal configuration using the Advanced setup options described in
the previous chapter. The objects then become part of the terminal's software
configuration and as a result are supported by the powerful Airloader AutoConfiguration tools described in Chapter 8.
Clicking on the Object Editors menu of the Twin Client Manager displays the editor
menu.
The following sections describe the use of each object, how to create the object, and how
to assign the object to a terminal configuration using the Advanced Setup options.
A detailed description of the Extended Commands, which are used by applications to
dynamically control the terminal scanner and keyboard, is included in this chapter. The
advanced emulation-specific configuration options to which the previous chapter refers
are also described here.
Keyboard/Mapping
The Keyboard/Mapping object is used to change the functionality of the terminal
keyboard. This feature is most often used to simplify keyboard usage and reduce operator
workload. It is also used to reduce re-training requirements when introducing new
terminal models.
Twin Client Reference
•
June, 2004
6-1
Advanced Integration
The need for keyboard mapping is a result of the size-restricted keypads common to all
portable terminal devices. Compensating for the physical limitations, the manufacturer
uses state modifier keys to expand the functionality of the keypad. As a result, many keys
(e.g., the Up-Arrow key) require the operator to press two or more keys to emulate a
single keystroke. Because many applications tend to rely heavily on a small group of
keys, it is advantageous to map those frequently used keys to single key strokes, thus
increasing both productivity and user acceptance.
Note: If key re-mapping does not appear to work on the 694x terminal, press the key
sequence Func+Shift after a cold boot. This will take the terminal out of Caps
Lock state and the key mapping will work as expected. It will stay latched in this
state until another cold boot or another Func+Shift sequence is performed.
Creating the Keyboard/Mapping Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then click on Keyboard/Mapping and
select a terminal type.
Click on the desired terminal model and click on OK, which starts the keyboard mapper
for the selected terminal model.
6-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keyboard/Mapping
The Keyboard Mapper screen provides a mock-up of a keypad on the left side of the
window, and options for key remapping on the right. By clicking on a key on the keypad
mock-up, the available options that apply to that key appear on the right. For example,
clicking on the key at the lower right corner of this model changes the display as follows.
The first column on the right side of the window, entitled Transmit, defines the
emulation key assigned to the highlighted keypad button in each of the available
keyboard states (unshifted, shifted, alpha lock, etc.). Each modified key state is initially
blank, indicating that the Twin Client default is in effect and no changes will be made to
that key or its Mode of operation. Refer to Chapter 10 for the table of default Twin
Client key assignments for each Symbol terminal.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-3
Advanced Integration
After a key is selected, the Mode options change depending on the key selection. The
Mode column defines the action taken by the selected key combination.
The table of mode options, and their effect, is as follows.
xmit
Transmits the key.
noop
Disables the key.
edleft
Non-destructive backspace (moves) to the left of the cursor within a field.
edrite
Non-destructive space (moves) to the right of the cursor within a field.
edbksp
Destructive backspace (moves) to the left of the cursor within a field.
edeeof
Erases from current position to end of field.
edefld
Erases entire field.
lhelp
Displays terminal ID, date, time, and terminal software version number.
scan
Activates the scanner.
Saving and Assigning the Keyboard/Mapping Object
Save the object by clicking on File, Save As, and then enter a name. For the purposes of
this example, the name is vt.
6-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keyboard Macros
Then click on Save. Return to the Twin Client Manager menus by clicking on the
button at the upper right corner of the Keyboard Mapper window.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Keyboard tab, then on the Mapping
Object list button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the keyboard mapping will take effect.
Keyboard Macros
The Keyboard/Macro object is used to assign sequences of characters to the VT/HP
programmable function keys. Using this feature, strings of characters can be assigned to
a single keystroke.
Creating the Keyboard Macro Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Keyboard/Macros, and then enter
a file name. For the purposes of this example, the name is vt.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-5
Advanced Integration
Click on the Open button, and then click on the Yes button to create the new file.
The Notepad utility is then invoked. The Keyboard/Macro object is a text file with one
entry per line. Each entry uses the following format,
<keyname>=<macro string>;
where <keyname> is pf1 to pf24, and <macro string> is the macro text assigned to that
specific key. For example, to assign the text "vt100" followed by a carriage return to the
pf9 key, the entry is:
Note:
\015 represents the octal value for “carriage return”. Refer to Chapter 9, ASCII
Character Set Octal Values.
Saving and Assigning the Keyboard Macro Object
Save the object by clicking on File, then on Save, and then on Exit, which returns to the
Twin Client Manager menu.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Keyboard tab, then on the Macro
Object list button, and finally on the object name.
6-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Scanner/Data Mapping
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the keyboard macro will take effect.
Scanner/Data Mapping
The Scanner/Data Mapping object defines barcode sequences that, when encountered in
scanned data, are automatically converted to emulator keystrokes. This feature can be
used to reduce or eliminate keyboard entry by the operator. That is, instead of pressing
the PF3 key to access a help screen, the operator scans a barcode that is mapped to the
keystroke.
Creating the Scanner/Data Mapping Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Scanner Data/Mapping, and then
enter a file name. For the purposes of this example, the name is vt.
Click on the Open button, and then click on the Yes button to create the new file.
The Notepad utility is then invoked. The Scanner/Data mapping object is a text file with
one entry per line. Each entry uses the following format, <barcode>=<keystroke>;
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-7
Advanced Integration
where <barcode> is the scanned barcode and <keystroke> is the keystroke to send when
the barcode is scanned. The following example object demonstrates three scan data
mappings, including the mapping of barcode $H to the PF3 keystroke.
Note: The scan data mapper accepts octal notation. See the example below.
#
# Sample scanner data mapping object
#
001253=pf4;
\011=tab;
\015=enter;
ENT=enter;
TB=tab;
Saving and Assigning the Scanner/Data Mapping
Object
Save the object by clicking on File, then on Save, and then on Exit, which returns to the
Twin Client Manager menu.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Scanner tab, then on the Data
Mapping Object list button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the scanner data mapping will take effect.
Scanner/Data Editing
The Scanner/Data Editing object defines the rules for recognizing barcode patterns, and
then for performing automatic manipulations on the barcode before it is transmitted to
the host application. This feature is most often employed when upgrading wedge-based
systems.
Creating the Scanner/Data Editing Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Scanner/Data Editing.
6-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Scanner/Data Editing
Barcode recognition is based on the size (length) and recognition specifiers. Once the
pattern is recognized, operation specifiers manipulate the barcode.
The recognition specifiers consist of the four characters shown in the following table:
A
N
*
=
Alpha character
Numeric character
Any character
Must match next character
The operation specifiers consist of the following constructs:
X
*
()
““
Delete character
Copy as is
Substitute
Insert
The following table illustrates how the recognition and operation specifiers identify and
manipulate the data.
Barcode
Size
Recognition
Operation
Result
PN-1245
7
AA=-NNNN
“F”*******
FPN-1245
5A5567BBAT
10
**********
**********”M”
5A5567BBATM
TGR87
5
=T=GAN*
**(S)**
TGS87
78-RHG
6
NN=-AAA
**X***
78RHG
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-9
Advanced Integration
Quote Character
If you need to insert a " (quote) character on the operation side you may now do this.
You use the sequence \".
Example: "\""***(AB)**
This example will insert a " (quote) character to the front of each bar code.
Variable Length Operation
The scan editor allows operations to be done on variable length labels.
The variable length character is the ~ (tilde) and it must go into the operation
side of the rule.
Rules:
1. The size must be set to zero.
2. The tilde must be in the operation side.
Example: This example will delete the first character from any bar code size that
starts with any ALPHA character.
6-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Scanner/Decoder Control
Saving and Assigning the Scanner/Data Editing Object
Save the object by clicking on File, Save As, and then enter a name. For the purposes of
this example, the name is vt.
Then click on Save. Return to the Twin Client Manager menus by clicking on the
button at the upper right corner of the Scan Editor window.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Scanner tab, then on the Data Editor
Object list button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the scan data editor object will take effect.
Scanner/Decoder Control
The Scanner/Decoder Control object modifies the operation of the scan decoder in the
terminal. Any of the supported symbologies can be enabled or disabled, and all of the
parameters associated with a specific symbology can be modified to meet specific
customer requirements.
This feature is used primarily to reduce errors and increase performance. For example, a
terminal used in a receiving application can be restricted to symbologies used only in the
receiving department, thus reducing the opportunity for scan decoder errors and, in many
cases, increasing scanner performance. As another example, the scan decoder can be
instructed to return a successful scan only when the barcode is of a certain length. As a
result, the opportunity for a scan decoder error is further reduced.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-11
Advanced Integration
Twin Client also allows the scanner to be controlled dynamically by the application. This
is accomplished through the use of the Extended Command set, which is described later
in this chapter.
Creating the Scanner/Decoder Control Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Scanner/Decoder Control.
The check box next to the symbology enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the
symbology. The options for a specific symbology are available for modification by
highlighting the select symbology.
Saving and Assigning the Scan/Decoder Control Object
Save the object by clicking on File, Save As, and then enter a name. For the purposes of
this example, the name is vt.
6-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Display/Mapping
Then click on Save. Return to the Twin Client Manager menus by clicking on the
button at the upper right corner of the Decoder Control window.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Scanner tab, then on the Decoder
Control Object list button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the scan decoder control object will take effect.
Display/Mapping
The Display/Mapping object is used to correct variations between application character
sets and the terminal display character set. The terminal display uses the ISO-8859-1 font
set, which is an international standard adhered to by most, but not all, applications. The
display mapping is used to resolve any discrepancies.
Creating the Display/Mapping Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Display/Mapping, and then enter a
file name. For the purposes of this example, the name is vt.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-13
Advanced Integration
Click on the Open button, and then click on the Yes button to create the new file.
The Notepad utility is then invoked. The Display/Mapping object is a text file with one
entry per line. Each entry uses the following format,
<application char>=<ISO-8859-1 char>,xlat;
where <application char> is the hexadecimal value of the character transmitted by the
host application, and <ISO-8859-1 char> is the hexadecimal value of the desired terminal
display character, followed by a comma, the word xlat, and a semicolon. Tables for both
ISO-8859-1 and the ASCII character sets are in Chapter 9.
For the purposes of this example, the English character e (0x65) will be converted to an
umlaut ë (0xEB) with the entry shown below. Note that that the two character
hexadecimal values must be preceded by 0x.
Saving and Assigning the Display/Mapping Object
Save the object by clicking on File, then on Save, and then on Exit, which returns to the
Twin Client Manager menu.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Display tab, then on the Mapping
Object list button, and finally on the object name.
6-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Display/Formatting
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the display mapping object will take effect.
Display/Formatting
The Display/Formatting object is used to make the host application interface easier to
use, without modifying the host application. Chapter 7 is devoted to the description of
this important integration feature.
Printer/Init
The Printer/Init object is used to send initialization commands to the printer at the start
of each terminal session. It can also be used to test printer operation.
Creating the Printer/Init Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Printer/Init, and then enter a file
name. For the purposes of this example, the name is vt.
Click on the Open button, and then click on the Yes button to create the new file.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-15
Advanced Integration
The Notepad utility is then invoked. The printer/init object is a text file, allowing for the
entry of printer-specific commands. Refer to the documentation provided by the printer
manufacturer for instructions.
Saving and Assigning the Printer/Init Object
Save the object by clicking on File, then on Save, and then on Exit, which returns to the
Twin Client Manager menu.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Printer tab, then on the Init Object list
button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the init object will be transmitted to the printer at the start of the next
Telnet session.
Dialog
The Dialog object is a script used to automate the user logon process with the host
application. It can be used to create terminal screens, collect input, generate output, and
make decisions based upon terminal keyboard or scanner input, and host application
data.
Creating the Dialog Object
Create the object by clicking on Object Editors, then Dialog. Commands selected from
scrolling list on the right are added or inserted into the scripting area on the left using the
click buttons between the two areas. The bottom left portion of the window is used to
collect arguments for those commands that require them.
6-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Dialog
Commands and Arguments
Commands control the actions taken within the script. They can be used to interact both
with the host and the terminal, and to modify activity based on comparisons of both
terminal and host data. The following tables describe each command.
Label
Defines a target for the conditional branch commands Onfail,
Equal, If, Host State, Host Scan, and the unconditional
branch command, Goto.
Goto
Causes execution to begin unconditionally and immediately at
the named target Label.
On Fail
Upon detection of a system error, execution continues at the
named Label.
Equals
If the comparison is equal, branches to Label. Otherwise,
execution continues with the next command.
If
Set Var
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
If the conditions of the comparison operator are true,
branches to Label. Otherwise, execution continues with the
next command. The numeric value comparison operators,
which treat the values being compared numerically, are =
(equal). != (not equal), > (greater than), and < (less than). The
string value comparison operators, which treat the values as
character strings, are $= (equal) and $!= (not equal).
Assigns a value to one of up to 36 variables.
6-17
Advanced Integration
Change Var
Concat
Adds characters to the end of a variable.
Session
Returns control of the session to the terminal operator. The
operator returns control to the dialog object, at the next line,
by pressing the key defined as the End Key in the Keyboard
tab.
Host On
Initiates a TCP/IP connection to the host system.
Host Off
Terminates the TCP/IP connection to the host system.
Host Scan
Scans the host display for a value, and continues execution at
the named label if the value is found.
Host Update
Refreshes the host display. This command is used after data
has been sent to the host that may change the display, and
prior to using the Host Scan or Host State conditional branch
commands, or a Host Copy command.
Host Send
Transmits data and/or a keystroke to the host.
Host Copy
Copies characters from the host display to a variable.
Host State
If the state of the session matches the value supplied,
execution begins at the named Label. The possible values
are inactive, meaning the host session has not been
established, and plu, which means the host session has been
established.
Settle
Term Enable
Term Clear
Term Display
Term input
Term No Echo
Term Wait
Term Logoff
Exit
Sleep
Var Char
Log
Comment
6-18
Adds to or subtracts from the value of a variable.
Allows time for the host application to settle.
Initializes the terminal configuration parameters.
Clears the terminal display of all characters.
Puts a value or the value of a variable on the terminal display.
Prompts the terminal operator to input data.
Prompts the terminal operator to input data, which will not be
echoed on the terminal display.
Waits for any input from the terminal.
Terminates the connection to the wireless network.
Terminates execution of the dialog object.
Suspends all activity for the specified number of seconds.
Sets the character used internally by the dialog processor to
indicate the name of a variable. The character is normaLoglly
$. This command is used only when the first character of a
value used in one of the conditional branching commands
begins with a $.
Writes a message to the terminal log.
Inserts documentation in the dialog object.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Dialog
Adding Commands
The scrolling list box on the right side of the window is used to select a command. Click
on the desired command and then click on the Add button to add the command to the
dialog script.
All commands that require arguments prompt for them in the box at the lower left side of
the window. In the example above, the Term Display command requires a row number
and either a variable or a character string. In this case the display string is Hello World.
Note that the text entry field scrolls to the right so that text longer than the size of the
box can be entered.
Inserting and Deleting Commands
Click on the desired dialog line on the upper left side of the window to highlight the line,
then click on the Insert button to insert a new command above the selected line, or click
on the Delete button to remove the line.
Using Variables and Labels
The dialog object provides up to 36 variables to store temporary data collected during the
execution of the script.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-19
Advanced Integration
These variables can be compared to fixed values or other variables using the if
command. If the comparison is true, execution branches to the specified label.
Saving and Assigning the Dialog Object
Save the object by clicking on File, Save As, and then enter a name. For the purposes of
this example, the name is vt.
6-20
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Extended Commands
Then click on Save. Return to the Twin Client Manager menus by clicking on the
button at the upper right corner of the Decoder Control window.
Next, assign the object to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal configuration
from the File menu. Click on the advanced setup Display tab, then on the Dialog Object
list button, and finally on the object name.
Save the updated terminal configuration by clicking on File, and then Save. The next
time the terminal is cold-booted, the new configuration will be downloaded
automatically and the dialog object will take effect.
Extended Commands
The host application can control the terminal's scanner and keyboard dynamically, while
the terminal is in session, by displaying in the host application presentation the extended
commands described in the following sections.
Dynamic Decoder Control
The format and content of the commands that control the scan decoder are described in
the following sub-sections.
Note: There is an issue with Symbol's I2of5 decoder defaults. Symbol has specified a
minimum length of 14 and a maximum length of 10 for the I2of5 decoder. This
results in allowing only I2of5 barcodes of length 14 and 10 to be scanned. In order
to scan I2of5 barcodes of length 6 to 14, you will need to create a barcode decoder
object for I2of5 that specifies a minimum length of 6 and a maximum length of
14.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-21
Advanced Integration
CODABAR Control
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?0;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable codabar scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are 1–54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are 1–54.
CODE 11 Control
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?11;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;<depend>z
•= State:
Disable/enable code 11. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are from 4 to 54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are from 4 to 54.
•= Depend:
Number of check digit. Valid values are 0, 1 or 27.
CODE 128
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?2;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable code 128 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Specify minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are from 1 to 54.
•= Maxlen:
Specifies the maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must
be greater than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are from 1 to 54.
CODE 39
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?3;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;<depend>z
•= State:
Disable/enable code 39 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
1 to 54.
Specifies the minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are from
•= Maxlen:
Specifies the maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must
be greater than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are from 1 to 54.
•= Depend:
Disable/enable full ASCII code 39 interpretation. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
CODE 49
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?4;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
6-22
Disable/enable code 49 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Extended Commands
CODE 93
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?5;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable code 93 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are 1–54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are 1–54.
D 2 of 5
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?6;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable code 25. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values range from 1–54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values range from 1–54.
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?7;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable interleaved 2 of 5 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values range from 1 to 54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values range from 1–54.
EAN-13
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?8;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable EAN-13 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
EAN-8
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?9;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable EAN-8 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
PLESSEY/MSI
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?10;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;<depend>z
•= State:
Disable/enable code MSI scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-23
Advanced Integration
•= Minlen:
Minimum valid barcode length. Valid values are from 4 to 54.
•= Maxlen:
Maximum valid barcode length. The maximum length must be greater
than or equal to the minimum length. Valid values are from 4 to 54.
•= Depend:
Specifies the number of required check digits. Valid values are 0, 1, or 2.
UPC-A
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?13;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable UPC-A scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
UPC-E0
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?14;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable UPC-E0 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
UPC-E1
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?15;<state>;0;0;0z
•= State:
Disable/enable UPC-E1 scanning. 0=disabled, 1=enabled.
Supplemental Barcode Handling (UPC/EAN) Options
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?12;<state>;<minlen>;<maxlen>;<depend>z
•= State:
This flag should always be set to one.
•= Minlen:
Specifies if two character supplementals are enabled/disabled (only
applies to transmit mode 1). 0=no codes with two character supplementals decoded,
1=codes with two character supplementals decoded.
•= Maxlen:
Indicates if five character supplementals are enabled/disabled (only
applies to transmit mode 1). 0=no codes with five character supplementals decoded,
1=codes with five character supplementals decoded.
•= Depend:
Specifies the supplemental transmit mode. 0=no supplementals
transmitted to host, supplemental enable/disable ignored. 1=only codes with the
appropriate supplemental (from minlen/maxlen) decoded. 2=all codes sent as is,
supplemental enable/disable ignored.
Disabling All Decoders
Extended Command:
<ESC>[?z
6-24
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Extended Commands
This command is used to disable all barcodes on the handheld. Typically this would be
issued before turning on an individual barcode type just to make sure of the state of the
active barcodes.
Input Mode Command
The input mode parameter sent from the application controls (via the host application)
whether the terminal accepts input from the keyboard, the scanner or both. The format of
this command is as follows:
<ESC>[!1;<mode>z
The mode parameter can be one of the following:
Mode
Action
Description
Scan and Key
Data initially accepted from either the keyboard or
scanner. Scanning, allowed on a partially keyed
field, causes the keyed data to be discarded and the
scanned data to be accepted.
1
Scan or Key
Data initially accepted from either the keyboard or
scanner. Scanning is not allowed on a partially
keyed field. If the operator clears the field then
scanning is again allowed.
2
Scan Only
Data accepted only from the scanner. Use caution
when using this command, bad barcode can block
the user from completing input.
3
Key Only
Data accepted only from keyboard, the scanner off.
0
(default)
Key Input Mode Command
The processing of keyed input can be controlled dynamically, while the terminal is in
session. The format of this command is as follows:
<ESC>[!2;<mode>z
The mode parameter can be one of the following.
Mode
0
(default)
Description
Accepts characters between 0x20 and 0x7F.
1
Accepts alphabetic characters only.
2
Accepts numeric characters only.
3
Accepts alphanumeric characters only.
For example, to allow keyboard input of numeric characters only, use the following
sequence:
<ESC>[!1;3z<ESC>[!2;2z
(HEX equivalent: 1B 5B 21 31 3B 33 7A 27 5B 21 32 3B 32 7A)
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-25
Advanced Integration
To reset the terminal back to normal input, use the following sequence:
<ESC>[!1;0z<ESC>[!2;0z
(HEX equivalent: 1B 5B 21 31 3B 30 7A 27 5B 21 32 3B 30 7A)
Dynamic Font Change
Where DoubleHigh and DoubleWide can each be either 0 or 1:
<ESC>[!5;<DoubleHigh>;<DoubleWide>;z
To set only Double High mode:
<ESC>[!5;1;0;z
To set only Double Wide mode:
<ESC>[!5;0;1;z
To set Double High, Double Wide mode:
<ESC>[!5;1;1;z
To restore normal fonts:
<ESC>[!5;0;0;z
Advanced Display Options for VT/HP
The Advanced button in the advanced view Display tab is active when VT100, VT220,
or HP700 emulation is selected. This option group controls how display attributes are
processed, and it can also be used to simulate block mode operation (see the Mode
option description in the Chapter 5 section, Customizing the Keyboard).
Attribute Mask
This check box group enables (checked), or disables (unchecked), the display of the
indicated character attribute. Symbol character-based terminal displays are capable of
displaying only the Reverse and Blinking attributes. All other attributes, if enabled, are
displayed in Reverse, except for those attributes checked in the Blink Mask group (see
below).
6-26
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Advanced 3270 Keyboard Options
Field Mask
The VT100 and VT220 protocols do not support the more efficient block mode of
operation that is standard in the 3270 and 5250 protocols, since there are no VT100 or
VT220 protocol commands for defining input fields.
However, Twin Client makes it possible to simulate block mode operation by using
video display attributes to define input fields. Each box checked in the Field Mask
window indicates a video attribute that will be recognized as an input field specification
by the emulator. During a terminal session with a host, whenever the cursor is positioned
on character with the selected attribute(s), all characters to the right of that position with
the same attribute are interpreted to specify the length of the input field.
Blink Mask
This check box group is used to enable (checked), or disable (unchecked), the conversion
of the selected attribute to Blinking.
Advanced 3270 Keyboard Options
The Advanced button in the advanced view Keyboard tab is active when 3270
emulation is selected. The option groups in this window are used to automate keystroke
generation under the special conditions described in the following subsections. It is also
used determine the action taken with oversized scans.
Attribute Key
This option is used to automatically transmit a keystroke to the 3270 host when the 3270
field matches the selected attribute. The automatic keystroke generation can be based on
whether the input is scanned, or keyed, or both.
Note: When this feature is made active (setting the Key to a value other than noop and
setting the Scan Field and or Key Field to a value other than off) it overrides all
other automatic keystroke generation rules except for the Last Field Keys rules
(described later in this section).
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-27
Advanced Integration
Key
This scrolling list box is used to select the 3270 keystroke sent with scanned or keyed
input when the field matches the selected attribute setting specified in Scan Field and
Key Field (described below). This option overrides all other automatic keystroke
generation, except for Last Field processing. The default key setting of noop disables
this function.
Scan Field
This scrolling list box selects the 3270 field attribute that, when data is scanned into the
field, results in automatic transmission of the selected Key with the data to the host. The
choices are pen (for 3270 Light Pen Enabled), num (for 3270 Numeric Only), hi (for
3270 High Intensity) and hal (for 3270 High Intensity and Light Pen Enabled). The
default value is off.
Key Field
This scrolling list box selects the 3270 field attribute that, when data is keyed into the
field and the field is completely filled, results in automatic transmission of the selected
Key with the data to the host. The choices are pen (for 3270 Light Pen Enabled), num
(for 3270 Numeric Only), hi (for 3270 High Intensity) and hal (for 3270 High Intensity
and Light Pen Enabled). The default value is off.
Last Field Keys
This option is used to automate keystroke generation when the keyed or scanned input is
into the last field on the 3270 display.
Note: When this rule generates a keystroke, it overrides all other automatic keystroke
generation rules (i.e., Scan Key, Auto Send Key, and Attribute Key).
Scanned Input
This scrolling list box is used to select the 3270 keystroke to be sent when data is
scanned into the last field on the 3270 display. The default value is noop, which disables
this function.
Keyed Input
This scrolling list box is used to select the 3270 keystroke to be sent when data is keyed
into the last field on the 3270 display, and the field is filled. The default value is noop,
which disables this function.
Multiple Fields
This check box enables (checked) the Last Field Keys group only if the host display
contains more than one input field.
6-28
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
New Environ Telnet Extension
New Environ Telnet Extension
The New Environ Telnet extension, also known as Workstation ID, is a mechanism for
providing named variables with values to the host system via a Telnet negotiation at the
beginning of each terminal session.
The New Environ option under the Twin Client Manager's Settings menu is used to
create the variables, which are applied to all terminal configurations. Variables can be
created that apply only to specific terminals (indicated by IP address). It is also possible
to create variables that apply to all terminals.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-29
Advanced Integration
Creating Common Settings
Variables that apply to all terminal sessions are created by clicking on the Common to
all terminals button, and then entering the Variable and Value in the respective boxes.
Then click on the Set button.
The variable and its value are then displayed in bottom list window.
Creating Terminal Specific Settings
Variables that apply to specific terminal sessions are created by clicking on the Terminal
Specific button, and entering the last two octets of the terminal IP address. Then enter
the Variable and Value in the respective boxes and click on the Set button.
6-30
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
New Environ Telnet Extension
Note: Click on the Show all settings check box to display both terminal specific and
common variables.
When you set up the IP address in the New Environment entry form, you can get an
“Invalid terminal address” error message. This error is from a routine that checks the IP
address for accuracy. In IP settings, it is possible to use octal notation rather than the
more common decimal method we see most often.
The rule is that if there is a leading zero, it assumes octal notation and checks for a valid
octal value (legal octal values are 0-7). For example if the second half of your terminal
IP address is 078.131, the 8 in the .078 is what causes the error. The terminal client
needs the leading zero(s) to correctly find the IP address. This leads to a catch 22.
Note: The following work-around will require that you hand edit the configuration file to
add the leading zeros if required.
1. Enter the address as normal without any leading zeros. If they are all 3-digit octets,
you need do nothing. If any octet is less than 3 digits, do the next step.
2. Open the PowerNet\TwinClient\tnenv.cf file for edit. Add leading zeros to entries:
78.132:DEVNAME=RF001;!
1.133:DEVNAME=RF002;!
12.134:DEVNAME=RF003;!
→
→
→
078.132:DEVNAME=RF001;!
001.133:DEVNAME=RF002;!
012.134:DEVNAME=RF003;!
Save and send this to the terminal by doing a "Terminal/Send Configuration Files to
Terminal" operation.
Changing and Deleting Settings
Variable names and their values can be modified or deleted by clicking on the variable in
the list window. Change the variable or value by editing the Variable and/or Value
boxes, and click on the Set button. To delete the variable, press the Delete key on the
PC. Deleted variables will continue to appear in the pull down list until after the settings
have been saved.
Saving New Environ
Click on the OK button to save the New Environ settings.
TN3270E Negotiation
The following defines the TN3270E negotiation, permitting the transfer of some of the
TN3270E Sub-negotiation variables such as Lunames from the Telnet terminal to the
host during session initialization.
Note: This pertains to 3270 emulation.
TN3270E is implemented on OpenAir Linux using two text files located in the working
directory (refer to /etc/.CRF/WORKDIR). The tnenvcom.cf file allows for the definition
of variables that will be shared by all devices, and the tnenv.cf file allows for the
definition of terminal-specific variables. These files are currently created and maintained
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-31
Advanced Integration
with the system editor.
Line Entry Format, tnenvcom.cf:
VARIABLE=VALUE;
Example *DEVTYP=IBM-3278-2;*CONNECT=RFZ81;
This will assign all terminals the luname of RFZ81.
Line Entry format, tnenv.cf:
IDENT:VARIABLE=VALUE;[VARIABLE=VALUE]…!
Where IDENT is either the last two octets of the terminal's IP address, or the three digit
Spectrum address (065-511). Multiple variables can be defined, separated by semicolons. The entry is terminated with an exclamation.
Example file:
#IP terminals fully qualified octets 7 characters:
010.031:*DEVTYPE=IBM-3278-2;*CONNECT=RF3278.001;!
010.032:*DEVTYPE=IBM-3278-2;*CONNECT=RF3278.002;!
This will assign the terminal with an IP address of xxx.yyy.010.031 a device type of IBM3278-2 to the luname of RF3278.001.
New Environ Negotiation
The following defines the New Environ negotiation, permitting the transfer of
environmental variables from the Telnet terminal to the host during session initialization.
Note: This pertains to the 5250 and VT emulations.
New Environ is implemented on OpenAir Linux using two text files located in the
working directory (refer to /etc/.CRF/WORKDIR). The tnenvcom.cf file allows for the
definition of variables that will be shared by all devices, and the tnenv.cf file allows for
the definition of terminal-specific variables. These files are currently created and
maintained with the system editor.
Line Entry Format, tnenvcom.cf:
VARIABLE=VALUE;
Line Entry format, tnenv.cf:
IDENT:VARIABLE=VALUE;[VARIABLE=VALUE]…!
Where IDENT is either the last two octets of the terminal's IP address, or the three digit
Spectrum address (065-511). Multiple variables can be defined, separated by semicolons. The entry is terminated with an exclamation.
Example file:
6-32
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
New Environ Telnet Extension
#IP terminals fully qualified octets 7 characters:
010.031:DEVNAME=RF5291.001;!
#Spectrum ONE fully qualified radio ID 3 characters
065:DEVNAME=RF5291.002;!
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
6-33
Advanced Integration
This page is intentionally blank.
6-34
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 7 • The Display Formatter
The display formatter adapts full screen Telnet applications to the portable terminal
environment without any modification to the host application. This powerful tool is
included with Twin Client, and is also used with the OpenAir server when the Twin
Client is operating in the Server mode.
A screen capture utility (included with the Twin Client Manager) is used to access the
host application via Telnet and "capture" the host displays. Once captured, the screens
are processed into a screen formatter object and assigned to a terminal configuration,
which can then be downloaded automatically to the terminal, over the wireless network.
The Twin Client Display Formatter provides the following unique features:
•= Performance – Optimized for minimum run-time overhead and maximum speed.
•= Transparency – Fully transparent to the host application.
•= Capacity – Up to 128 host screens per object, 16 terminal screens per host screen,
and 32 input fields per terminal screen.
•= Simplicity – Intuitive drag-and-drop interface for screen capture and formatting.
•= Flexibility – Supports all Twin Client terminals.
This chapter describes how to set the emulation, capture the host application displays,
and process them into formatter objects for download to the terminal.
Setting the Emulation
The first step in the formatting process is to set the emulation (VT/HP, 3270, or 5250) in
preparation for capturing the host application displays. Click on and Start, Programs,
PowerNet, Twin Client Manager, and then on the Settings menu, as shown below.
Click on Emulation and select an emulator from the list below.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-1
The Display Formatter
Then click on OK to return to the main Twin Client menu.
Starting the Emulator
Start the emulator by clicking on the Object Editors menu and Screen Capture, as
shown below.
The emulation window is displayed. Click on the Session menu, and then click on
Session Settings.
In the Session Settings menu, enter the Host IP address and port of the host system, and
then Click on OK to return to the emulator main menu.
7-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Starting the Emulator
Note: The Host Port of 23 is standard for Telnet. However, for security reasons the port
number may be set to other values. Consult the local network administrator if a
connection cannot be established on port 23.
toolbar icon, or click on the
To start a Telnet session with the host, click on the
Session menu and then on Connect. In this example, the 5250 emulator is used and the
host system is an IBM AS/400.
Note: In vt emulation, the Twin Client screen above contains a scroll bar to select
vt100, vt220, or hp700 emulation.
The host application displays are now ready to be captured.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-3
The Display Formatter
Taking Snapshots
The host screens are captured by clicking on the
toolbar icon while the desired
screen is displayed. Alternately, click on Session and then Snapshot. The following
pop-up indicates that the screen was captured.
Click on OK and continue to navigate the host application, taking snapshots of the
screens to be formatted.
Saving the Screen File
Save the snapshots at any time by clicking on the
toolbar icon. Alternately, click on
File and then Save As. The following window is displayed for entering the filename.
For this example, the filename is set to app1. Then click on the Save button to return to
the emulator.
Exiting the Emulator
The Telnet session is ended by clicking on the
toolbar icon, or by clicking on
Session and Disconnect. Return to the Twin Client Manager window to format the
screens by clicking on the icon at the top right corner of the emulator, or by clicking
on File and Exit.
7-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Formatting
The screen file created in the previous sections can now be formatted. This section
describes how to start the formatter, open a screen file, format the screens, save the
formatted object, and finally to assign it to a configuration.
Starting the Formatter
The formatter is started from the Twin Client Manager menu. Start the Twin Client
Manager by clicking on Start, Programs, PowerNet, and Twin Client Manager. Then
click on Object Editors, as shown below.
Click on the Display/Formatting option and the formatter window is displayed. To open
the screen file, click on File.
Then click on Open, and click on the screen filename.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-5
The Display Formatter
Then click on the Open button and the formatter window is displayed, including the first
host display that was captured. The terminal display window, which is blank at this time
since no formatting has taken place, is also shown.
Note:
The Terminal display window floats on top of the host screen. If it needs to be
moved, click on the title bar and drag it to a different area of the host screen.
Setting Up the Formatter
The terminal display must be set to match the terminal for which the formatter object is
to be created. Click on the Tools menu and then Setup.
Note: While reformatting the host screens, you are able to create display fields larger
than the selected screen size. This causes the reformatted screen not to appear on
the terminal. The work around is to delete the terminal screen(s) in question, and
then reformat them, paying attention to the width of the RF terminal screen.
7-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Click on the desired terminal display size, and also ensure that the host screen size is set
correctly. Then click on OK to return to the formatter.
Copying an Input Field
An input field is copied from the host display to the terminal display by the same method
used to copy text. Click the left side of the input field and drag the cursor to the right.
The input field will be highlighted. Now click on the field again and drag it to the desired
position in the Terminal display.
Adding an Input Field
To add an input field, create text in the screen formatter window, highlight it, and choose
Add Input Field from the Host menu. The input field added in the example below is a
lower-case letter “x”.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-7
The Display Formatter
Adding and Copying Variable Display Text
Variable text can be added to the terminal display by clicking on the Terminal window,
moving the cursor to the desired display position, and typing in the text (in this case,
variable text) as shown below.
To do this, move the cursor to the desired position in the host display and hold down the
mouse button while moving the cursor to the right. Then, right-click on the text to be
copied. This text will be highlighted as shown by the words “variable text” copied
below. Then drag the highlighted text to the desired position in the terminal display and
release the mouse button.
7-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Deleting a Field
Select the text to be deleted by highlighting it, and choose Delete Field from the Host
menu.
Finding a Field on the Terminal
To find a field on the terminal, choose Find Field on Terminal from the Host menu.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-9
The Display Formatter
Adding an Ident
Formatting requires each host screen to be uniquely identified. One way to do this is to
highlight unique text on the host screen (click on the left side of the text and drag the
mouse to the right). Then click on the right mouse button, as shown below.
From the pull down menu, click on Add Ident. The highlighted field is now colored red
on the host display, indicating that it is an Ident field. Up to 32 items can be highlighted
on each host screen, so if a number of screens share similar features, they can be
uniquely identified by adding more Idents. In the event that a group of host displays
differ only by position of input fields, input fields can be used for Idents also.
Removing an Ident
Remove an Ident field by highlighting it, and then selecting Remove Ident from the
Host menu.
7-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Navigating the Screen Formatter
To move to the first screen in the screen formatter, choose First Screen from the Host
menu.
To move to the next screen, select Next Screen from the Host menu.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-11
The Display Formatter
To move to the previous screen, select Previous Screen from the Host menu.
To move to the last screen, select Last Screen from the Host menu.
7-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Adding a Terminal Screen
New terminal screens are created by using the New button at the bottom of the Terminal
display window. This is useful when more that one terminal screen is required to format
the relevant data on the host screen. Up to 16 terminal displays can be associated with
each formatted host display. These are called terminal pages, and the page that is
displayed on the terminal at any point in time depends on the location of the host cursor
position. The page to which the corresponding input field is formatted is the one
displayed.
When multiple pages are present, the directional arrows are used to navigate through the
pages.
Deleting a Screen
To delete a screen, select Delete Screen from the Host menu.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-13
The Display Formatter
Saving the Formatter Object
The formatter object is saved by clicking on the
and Save.
toolbar icon, or by clicking on File
Assigning the Object to a Terminal Configuration
The formatter object is assigned to a terminal configuration by opening a terminal
configuration in the Twin Client Manager, assigning the object to the Display Formatting
Object, and saving the configuration.
To open a terminal configuration, click on File in the Twin Client Manager, as shown
below.
Then click on Open, and click on the desired terminal configuration.
7-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Formatting
Then click on the advanced view Display tab, pull down the Display Formatter Object
scrolling list box, and click on the object.
Save the newly modified terminal configuration using the
toolbar icon, or click on
File and then Save. The new configuration, incorporating the formatter object, is
updated on the terminal, automatically, by cold booting the terminal.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
7-15
The Display Formatter
This page is intentionally blank.
7-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 8 • Software Management
In addition to providing functions for the download of files to the terminal via the
traditional serial connection, the Twin Client Manager also provides for the management
of terminal software and configurations automatically, over the wireless network.
This chapter describes the automated capability in detail. Additional manual operations
involving serial download options are described at the end of this chapter.
Airloader Auto-Configuration
The software and supporting configuration files for all Twin Client terminals can be
configured for automated management after installing the Twin Client AirLoad Hex file
in the terminals, as described in Chapter 3. The Airloader Auto-Configuration from is
accessed from the Twin Client Manager Tools menu. Select Airloader.
Note: If no options are displayed, click the Advanced<< button.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
8-1
Software Management
Enabling Automatic Downloads
Click to put a check in the Allow terminals to be automatically configured via RF box to
enable automatic downloading. In the event another PC on the network is already
configured and active, the following warning message is displayed.
Synchronizing Configuration Files
Click to put a check in the Synchronize Configuration Files box to enable automatic
synchronization of configuration files on the terminal. When the terminal is cold booted,
its configuration files will be compared with the most recent on the PC. The terminal is
updated automatically if it does not have the latest revision.
Synchronizing Program Files
Click to put a check in the Synchronize Program Files box to enable automatic
synchronization of program files on the terminal. When the terminal is cold booted, its
program files will be compared with the most recent on the PC. The terminal is updated
automatically if it does not have the latest revision.
Automatic IP Address Assignment
New terminals will be assigned IP addresses automatically if the following box is
checked.
Note: Do not check this option if a DHCP server is configured to manage address
assignments.
To set the addresses, click on the Addresses button to access the Segment Address
Assignments dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
8-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Airloader Auto-Configuration
Enter the desired range in the From and To boxes as shown above, and then click on
Add.
Creating New Groups
New groups, with different configurations, can be created by clicking on the Terminal
Group Manager, and then clicking the right mouse button as shown below.
After the new group has been created, the group settings option becomes available for
change, as shown below.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-3
Software Management
After the Configuration File and all of the other parameters have been set, the group is
made active by clicking on the Active check box.
Note: A setting under the Group allows you to associate a saved server file (.svr file)
with a particular group. This means that the .svr file will get sent to the terminal
in place of the default power.net file. The .svr files are created in Twin Client
Manager under Tools/Servers.
8-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Airloader Auto-Configuration
Clicking on the Thin Mode button will cause all terminals in this group that are currently
running in thick mode to be switched to thin mode the next time Airloader is run on the
terminal.
Click on the Schedule button to view a dialog box for scheduling an automatic
Airloader update.
Select the desired time and click on OK. Click on Update Now to check all group
members for updates.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-5
Software Management
Setting the Segment
Checking the Segment button restricts a terminal group to a range of IP addresses. The
IP Address can be any valid address on the segment as it is used only to identify the
segment. The setting of the Net Mask can be used to restrict the range. This feature is
useful for segregating terminal groups by location.
Setting Force Reload
Clicking on the Force Reload button forces all terminals within a group to be
automatically updated. The following warning message appears.
Click on the Yes button to force the reload.
Setting the Default Terminal Group
New terminals that have not yet been assigned to any group are initially assigned to the
default group in effect when they are cold-booted.
Any group can be made the default group by clicking on the group, and then clicking on
the right mouse button. Then click on the Make Default option.
Reassigning Terminals
After a terminal has been configured and assigned to the default group, it can be
reassigned to a new group by clicking on the terminal icon as shown below.
8-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
TN Plus Features
Then, holding the mouse button down, drag the terminal icon to the desired group as
shown next.
Release the mouse button, which reassigns the terminal.
The next time the terminal is rebooted, it will be reconfigured as defined in the group
specification.
TN Plus Features
Under Tools in Twin Client Manager are the Screen Watcher, Terminal Messenger,
and RF Monitor features.
Note: The terminal may or may not be able to utilize the Screen Watcher or Terminal
Messenger features depending on its authorization codes.
Select Screen Watcher, enter the terminal’s IP address, and click on OK.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-7
Software Management
A screen will appear with a display resembling the terminal screen.
Clicking on the Font button on the upper left brings up a screen in which you can modify
the font settings, as shown below.
8-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
TN Plus Features
Select Terminal Messenger from the Tools menu.
You may enter an Address Range in the From and To boxes on this screen. Click on Add
when finished.
Enter a message to send in the space provided, select the terminal to receive this message
by clicking on it in the Select Terminal(s) column, and click on the Send button to send
the message of your choice to the terminal of your choice.
See the example of the Terminal Messenger screen below.
To remove a terminal from the list of terminals receiving your message, click on the
terminal number in the Select Terminal(s) column, and click on the Remove button.
Click on the appropriate button, Remove All, Select All, or Unselect All, to remove all
terminals, select all terminals, or unselect all terminals from the Select Terminal(s) list.
Note: Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple terminals.
Click on the Close button when finished.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-9
Software Management
Select RF Monitor from the Tools menu.
RF Monitor is an "Over The Air" diagnostic tool. It's used to collect diagnostic trace
information from RF terminals running PowerNet Twin Client software.
It runs on a Windows PC and will send a command to the RF terminal to start tracing.
The terminal, when it receives this command, will start sending the trace information
over the RF link to the PC that issued the command. This will be written to a file on this
PC that can be sent to us for analysis.
Click on File to Select Terminal or to Exit.
Choosing Select Terminal allows you to view a log of the terminal’s activity. Enter the
Terminal IP address and Terminal IP Port, and click on OK.
8-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
TN Plus Features
Click on Edit. Select Find, and/or Find Next to search for pieces of information in your
log, or select Clear to clear the search.
Click on Actions to Start the Monitor or Stop the Monitor.
Click on Tools to set Debug Levels or Settings.
The options in Debug Levels are shown below.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-11
Software Management
The maximum log file size can be set under Settings.
Click on View to show or hide the Toolbar and the Status Bar.
This is the Toolbar. It is found near the top of the screen.
This is the Status Bar. It is found at the bottom of the screen.
Click on Help to bring up the following screen.
8-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
TN Plus Features
RF Monitor is a very small program and does not even require installation. Just place it
in a directory on your PC and create a shortcut to run it. It will run on all versions of
Windows except V3.1 and Win 95.
1. Move RF MONITOR to a Win PC with Network access to the RF terminal.
2. Run RF MONITOR (create a shortcut or do a start/run).
3. From the pull down menus, select File/Select Terminal.
4. Key in the RF terminal IP address and leave the port at 1802.
5. From the pull down menu, select Tools/Select Debug levels. Set all levels to 9
except Data stream and SNA.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-13
Software Management
6. With the RF terminal sitting at the Press Any Key prompt, select Actions/Start
Monitor.
7. Press a key on the RF terminal to open a session, and you should see trace data in the
RF Monitor window. When done, end the trace and the file will be named
tnxxx.yyy.log (where xxx.yyy is the last 2 octets of the RF terminals IP address) in
the directory in which RF Monitor was running.
8-14
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
TN Plus Features
Common Problems with RF Monitor
•=
The trace won’t start.
RF Monitor uses UDP to send commands to the RF Device. On busy networks UDP
packets are not always delivered. The terminal can miss the command to start the
trace. Below are some things that can be useful:
a. Ping the RF terminal from the same PC before starting RF Monitor (seems to
"open" a path to the terminal).
b. Start the monitor with the terminal at the Press Any Key prompt. (While the
terminal is at this prompt, it's not doing much and has a better chance of hearing
the start trace command.)
•=
I don't understand what this trace means.
The trace that this tool collects is engineering level information. It allows an end user
to collect information that can be analyzed by Connect engineering.
It will generally be requested by Connect support to help diagnose a reported
problem.
To be able to read and understand these completely, you need to have an
understanding of:
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-15
Software Management
a. Emulation protocols (IBM 5250, IBM3270, DEC VT200, etc.)
b. PowerNet Twin Client products
c. RF Network concepts
d. Wired network concepts
e. Telnet sessions
f. TCP/IP
They are text files that can be read with any editor or viewer and can be useful to end
users and integrators even if they may not have all the requirements above.
•=
I have an intermittent problem and it could happen on any one of my 100
terminals. RF Monitor only does one terminal at a time. What can I do?
RF Monitor is not the right diagnostic tool for this type of problem. PowerNet
products have another diagnostic tool that can be used called the "Diagnostic
Server".
This tool can be setup to run trace diagnostics on up to 300 terminals at the same
time. This tool will be provided as needed for systems under PowerNet support
agreement OR by T&M when they are not covered.
It also includes the service of a PowerNet support engineer.
Server Transfer is another feature. From the Tools menu, select Server Transfer.
The FTP Settings screen appears.
To send object editor and configuration files from Windows to your Linux box, enter
your server address, and click on OK.
8-16
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
AirLoad Configuration
AirLoad Configuration
On the typical Symbol terminal, the client software will automatically find the Airloader
auto-configuration server and check for updates.
Downloading Symbol Files
Symbol terminals are normally delivered with Symbol software pre-installed. At the time
of this writing, that software includes the OS and its utility programs, LWP, and the
radio driver. Consult Symbol Technical documentation for the current files and version
numbers.
If the Symbol software is not installed or is out of date, the Twin Client Manager
provides for their installation. The following sections describe the required procedures.
Verifying the Symbol Files
Verify the presence of LWP by cold-booting the terminal (refer to the Chapter 3 section
Cold Booting the Terminal). Monitor the terminal display for a message similar to the
one shown in the following figure.
FLASH TERMINAL
LWP HEX v3.05-11
RF v1.04
If the message appears, then LWP, and the radio driver is already installed and the LWP
version number should be noted for reference later in this procedure. If this message does
not appear, then LWP.EXE is not installed; proceed to Symbol 3000 Series Terminal
Download Procedure, Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure, or Symbol CE
Terminal Download Procedure.
If LWP and the radio driver are installed, the terminal will attempt to associate with an
access point and then start an application. With nothing more than LWP and the radio
driver installed, the terminal will display a message similar to that shown in the
following figure.
No applications!
D:\>
The terminal is now at a DOS prompt and OS programs can be executed. In the event
that the terminal failed to associate, the Symbol radio configuration program, CFG24,
can be run to set the radio parameters correctly so that the terminal successfully
associates. Refer to Symbol documentation for detailed instructions on the use of
CFG24.
If the terminal reboots and displays a cursor in the upper left hand corner of the display
after LWP, UDP, and Twin Client are loaded, obtain the current version of Twin Client
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-17
Software Management
software from the web site (It should be at least 6.3.1.) or give the terminal an IP address
with cfg24 or cfg11.
While being operated, Symbol 802b.11 RF terminals may randomly lock up after a
power down. This is due to the radio not completely reviving on power up, and it
eventually recovers after about an hour. These terminals may also experience increased
disconnects and RF send errors. If so, contact Symbol for the latest drivers, LWP and
UPD for 802.11b RF terminals.
After setting the power down timer in Twin Client, the terminal may not power down.
This is caused by the PWR Management function within Symbol's CFG11 and CFG24
program. If you set the mode to "CAM", it overrides the selection you made in Twin
Client and the terminal will not power down. Set the PWR management to "PSP" within
Symbol's CFG11 and CFG24.
The terminal may associate to the wrong Access Points, in the case of a terminal with
two Access Points, one with the same ESSid as the terminal and the other with a
different ESSid. After the terminal associates to the Access Point with the same ESSid
and it roams to the other Access Point, it will associate but not communicate. This causes
multiple issues with AirLoader being able to configure the terminals. It will appear to
work, but actually won't. The terminal may hang, and you also may see poor radio
performance. Configure both the terminals and all Access Points to the same ESSid.
Contact Symbol for updated drivers.
Formatting the Flash Drive
If the Symbol LWP requires replacement, format the flash drive and then download the
desired LWP release. To format the drive, type FLSHFMT at the DOS prompt. After the
format operation completes, proceed to the next section for download instructions.
Downloading Symbol 3000 Series Files
Click on the Send Program Files to Terminal menu option.
Symbol files to be downloaded must be placed in the Twin Client subdirectory as shown
in the following figure.
8-18
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Downloading Symbol Files
Then, click on the Custom Hex File button and then on the desired file from the window
at the bottom, and then click on OK. Refer to Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download
Procedure, Symbol 7500 Terminal Download Procedure, or Symbol CE Terminal
Download Procedure for instructions on preparing the terminal for download.
After the download of the Symbol software, the Twin Client AirLoad Hex file can be
installed as described in the Selecting the AirLoad File section of Configuring the
Manager. The Twin Client Manager will then automatically manage the terminal
software and configuration.
The automated configuration management provided by the Twin Client Manager
eliminates the need for serial download of terminal configuration. However, this function
can be accomplished manually by clicking on Send Configuration Files to Terminal.
Note: This procedure assumes the Symbol LWP and Twin Client have been installed.
The following figure is displayed.
The procedure for running the LD.BAT utility on the terminal is described in the section
entitled Reloading the Setup Files below.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-19
Software Management
Downloading Symbol 7500 Terminal Files
1. On the terminal, run Config_11 from the boot up menu and assign the ESS ID, and
TCP/IP parameters including IP address, subnet, and router.
2. In Twin Client Manager, do the following:
a. Set the terminal type to Symbol 7500 and select the preferred emulation.
b. Select Terminal->Send Program Files To Terminal.
c. Select Standard Hex File and radio.hex, but don’t click OK just yet.
3. On the terminal, press and hold down the Power and Scan buttons until the terminal
reboots into IPL (Initial Program Loader) mode.
4. Select 115200 for baud rate.
5. Select Single Image and put the terminal in the cradle.
6. In Twin Client Manager, click the OK button.
7. After the transfer completes, select ‘Prev Menu’ then ‘Run System’ on the terminal
to restart.
8. Do Step 8 only if you first downloaded the hex file.
On the terminal do the following:
a. Select option 7 to get a dos prompt.
b. Enter d:\modstart to restart in Twin Client mode.
9. To download the Twin Client configuration files:
a. After the terminal finishes booting and gets to the ‘Press Any Key’ prompt, press
an uppercase C.
b. At the setup menu, press 4 – Receive Config and place the terminal in the
cradle.
c. In Twin Client Manager, select Terminal->Send Setup Files To Terminal and
click OK.
d. On the terminal, press Enter to start the transfer. When the transfer is complete,
press Enter to continue. The terminal will reboot and should find the new
configuration.
10. Repeat step 9 any time to download a new configuration.
11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 to switch emulations.
8-20
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Downloading Symbol Files
Downloading Symbol CE Terminal Files
The following procedure is for Symbol 2840, 7940, 8040, 8140, 8840, 8940, and 9000
terminals.
1. Boot the terminal.
2. Go to Start, Settings, and Control Panel.
3. Double-click on the Communications icon.
4. Select the PC Connection tab.
5. Click on Change Connection if you want to change the baud rate.
6. Change the baud rate here if necessary, and click OK.
7. On the PC, choose Connection Settings from the File menu in ActiveSync.
The Connection Settings screen appears as follows.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-21
Software Management
8. Make sure that the box is checked in front of the option entitled,
Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port.
9. Click on OK.
While ActiveSync is connecting, you will see the following screen.
8-22
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Downloading Symbol Files
When ActiveSync has connected, you will see the screen below.
10. Select No, and then click Next.
The Connected screen appears.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-23
Software Management
11. On the PC, select Send Program Files to Terminal from the Terminal menu in Twin
Client Manager.
The following screen will appear.
12. Click on OK.
The following screen will appear.
8-24
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Downloading Symbol Files
13. Click on OK.
14. On the PC, choose Send Configuration Files to Terminal from the Terminal menu
in Twin Client Manager.
You will see the following screen.
15. Click on OK.
The following screen will appear.
16. Click on OK.
17. On the terminal, click on Start, Programs, File Explorer, and Windows.
18. Select the Aironet Client Utility icon.
19. Enter the SSID, etc.
Click on OK.
Click on Start, Settings, and Control Panel.
Select the Network icon and choose on the Properties tab.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway, and click on OK.
Click on Start, Programs, TwinClient, and AirloaderSetup.
25. Make sure that the Run AirLoad checkbox is checked or unchecked, as desired.
26. Click on OK.
27. Warm boot the terminal.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-25
Software Management
Warm Boot the Terminal
On the portable terminal, power the terminal Off, then boot the terminal using the key
sequence specific to the terminal model as shown in the following table.
Warm Boot Sequence
Following Power Off
Terminal Model & Keypad
Key Sequence
284x
Hold down both the up and down
scroll buttons and press the App 4
button.
Hold / and + keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release / and + keys.
Hold 4 and 5 keys.
Press and release Power.
Release 4 and + keys.
314x, 35-key
614x, 35-key
314x, 46-key
354x, 47-key
384x, 46-key
684x, 46-key
104x, 27-key
394x, 54-key
6940, 54-key
794x
804x
814x
894x
9000
Hold P1 and Enter keys.
Press and release Power.
Release P1 and Enter keys.
Hold Shift and L keys.
Press and release Power.
Release Shift and L keys.
Press Power for 6 to 15 seconds.
Press and hold the PWR key (for
approximately 10 seconds) and
release it as soon as the screen
changes and the terminal begins
to reboot.
Press Backlight, Func, and
Down Arrow keys.
Press Power for 6 to 15 seconds.
Press and hold the Power key for
5 seconds.
Note: The 7500 terminal does not require a warm boot.
If a configuration has already been downloaded to the terminal, or this is not the first
time the terminal has been rebooted, proceed to the Reloading the Configuration section
below.
First-time Download of Configuration Files
After the first cold boot of the terminal following the download of a Twin Client
application, the following screen is displayed.
8-26
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Downloading Symbol Files
SELECT MODE
1 - Telnet
2 - Server
Press 1 to select Telnet and place the terminal in the cradle. Then click OK on the PC to
begin the download. After the download, warm boot the terminal, after which the
following is displayed on the terminal.
Twin Client
© 1991-2004, Connect, Inc.
Keypress to Continue
The terminal is now ready to begin a Telnet session using the configuration files just
downloaded.
Reloading the Configuration Files
Reloading the configuration files through the serial port requires that LD.BAT be
executed manually, before the radio driver is installed. This is accomplished by
interrupting the normal Twin Client startup process using the following technique.
Warm-boot the terminal and monitor the display for the message shown in the next
figure.
Loading ….
While the message is displayed, press the Ctrl, Func, and 1 keys. In the case of the 394x
and 694x series of terminals, press Ctrl and F1 instead. A DOS prompt is then displayed.
Type LD.BAT at this DOS prompt. Then place the terminal in the cradle and click OK
on the PC. After the download, warm boot the terminal, after which the following is
displayed on the terminal.
Twin Client
© 1991-2004, Connect, Inc.
Keypress to Continue
The terminal is now ready to begin a Telnet session with the new configuration files.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-27
Software Management
Creating Custom Hex Files
A custom hex file can be created for serial download to the terminal. The custom hex file
can be built with the currently opened Twin Client configuration information, and is
useful if the automatic configuration management capabilities are not used.
Click on the Send Program Files to Terminal menu option. Then click on the Create a
New Custom Hex File button.
Enter the filename, and click on the Include configuration files in the hex file check box
to include the current configuration file setup (if desired).
The new hex file is then created, and displayed in the bottom window.
8-28
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Creating Custom Hex Files
Refer to Symbol 3000 Series Terminal Download Procedure, Symbol 7500 Terminal
Download Procedure, or Symbol CE Terminal Download Procedure for the detailed
instructions to complete the download.
Twin Client Reference •
June, 2004
8-29
Software Management
This page is intentionally blank.
8-30
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 9 • Character Sets
ISO 8859-1 Character Set
Description
Char
non-breaking space
Dec
Hex
160
A0
inverted exclamation
¡
161
A1
cent sign
¢
162
A2
pound sterling
£
163
A3
general currency sign
¤
164
A4
yen sign
¥
165
A5
broken vertical bar
¦
166
A6
section sign
§
167
A7
umlaut (dieresis)
¨
168
A8
copyright
©
169
A9
feminine ordinal
ª
170
AA
left angle quote, guillemot left
«
171
AB
not sign
¬
172
AC
soft hyphen
-
173
AD
registered trademark
®
174
AE
macron accent
¯
175
AF
degree sign
°
176
B0
plus or minus
±
177
B1
superscript two
²
178
B2
superscript three
³
179
B3
acute accent
´
180
B4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
9-1
Character Sets
9-2
Description
Char
Dec
Hex
microsign
µ
181
B5
paragraph sign
¶
182
B6
middle dot
·
183
B7
cedilla
¸
184
B8
superscript one
¹
185
B9
masculine ordinal
º
186
BA
right angle quote, guillemot right
»
187
BB
fraction one-fourth
¼
188
BC
fraction one-half
½
189
BD
fraction three-fourths
¾
190
BE
inverted question mark
¿
191
BF
capital A, grave accent
À
192
C0
capital A, acute accent
Á
193
C1
capital A, circumflex accent
Â
194
C2
capital A, tilde
Ã
195
C3
capital A, dieresis or umlaut mark
Ä
196
C4
capital A, ring
Å
197
C5
capital AE diphthong (ligature)
Æ
198
C6
capital C, cedilla
Ç
199
C7
capital E, grave accent
È
200
C8
capital E, acute accent
É
201
C9
capital E, circumflex accent
Ê
202
CA
capital E, dieresis or umlaut mark
Ë
203
CB
capital I, grave accent
Ì
204
CC
capital I, acute accent
Í
205
CD
capital I, circumflex accent
Î
206
CE
capital I, dieresis or umlaut mark
Ï
207
CF
capital Eth, Icelandic
Ð
208
D0
capital N, tilde
Ñ
209
D1
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
ISO 8859-1 Character Set
Description
Char
Dec
Hex
capital O, grave accent
Ò
210
D2
capital O, acute accent
Ó
211
D3
capital O, circumflex accent
Ô
212
D4
capital O, tilde
Õ
213
D5
capital O, dieresis or umlaut mark
Ö
214
D6
multiply sign
×
215
D7
capital O, slash
Ø
216
D8
capital U, grave accent
Ù
217
D9
capital U, acute accent
Ú
218
DA
capital U, circumflex accent
Û
219
DB
capital U, dieresis or umlaut mark
Ü
220
DC
capital Y, acute accent
Ý
221
DD
capital THORN, Icelandic
Þ
222
DE
small sharp s, German (sz ligature)
ß
223
DF
small A, grave accent
à
224
E0
small A, acute accent
á
225
E1
small A, circumflex accent
â
226
E2
small A, tilde
ã
227
E3
small A, dieresis or umlaut mark
ä
228
E4
small A, ring
å
229
E5
small AE diphthong (ligature)
æ
230
E6
small C, cedilla
ç
231
E7
small E, grave accent
è
232
E8
small E, acute accent
é
233
E9
small E, circumflex accent
ê
234
EA
small E, dieresis or umlaut mark
ë
235
EB
small I, grave accent
ì
236
EC
small I, acute accent
í
237
ED
small I, circumflex accent
î
238
EE
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
9-3
Character Sets
9-4
Description
Char
Dec
Hex
small I, dieresis or umlaut mark
ï
239
EF
small Eth, Icelandic
ð
240
F0
small N, tilde
ñ
241
F1
small O, grave accent
ò
242
F2
small O, acute accent
ó
243
F3
small O, circumflex accent
ô
244
F4
small O, tilde
õ
245
F5
small O, dieresis or umlaut mark
ö
246
F6
division sign
÷
247
F7
small O, slash
ø
248
F8
small U, grave accent
ù
249
F9
small U, acute accent
ú
250
FA
small U, circumflex accent
û
251
FB
small U, dieresis or umlaut mark
ü
252
FC
small Y, acute accent
ý
253
FD
small THORN, Icelandic
þ
254
FE
small Y, dieresis or umlaut mark
ÿ
255
FF
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
ASCII Character Set
ASCII Character Set
Decimal and Hexadecimal Values
Dec
Hex
Dec
Hex
NUL
0
00
SP
32
20
SOH
1
01
!
33
21
Dec
Hex
Dec
Hex
@
64
40
`
96
60
A
65
41
a
97
61
STX
2
02
"
34
22
B
66
42
b
98
62
ETX
3
03
#
35
23
C
67
43
c
99
63
EOT
4
04
$
36
24
D
68
44
d
100
64
ENQ
5
05
%
37
25
E
69
45
e
101
65
ACK
6
06
&
38
26
F
70
46
f
102
66
BEL
7
07
´
39
27
G
71
47
g
103
67
BS
8
08
(
40
28
H
72
48
h
104
68
HT
9
09
)
41
29
I
73
49
i
105
69
NL
10
0A
*
42
2A
J
74
4A
j
106
6A
VT
11
0B
+
43
2B
K
75
4B
k
107
6B
NP
12
0C
,
44
2C
L
76
4C
l
108
6C
CR
13
0D
-
45
2D
M
77
4D
m
109
6D
SO
14
0E
.
46
2E
N
78
4E
n
110
6E
SI
15
0F
/
47
2F
O
79
4F
o
111
6F
DLE
16
10
0
48
30
P
80
50
p
112
70
DC1
17
11
1
49
31
Q
81
51
q
113
71
DC2
18
12
2
50
32
R
82
52
r
114
72
DC3
19
13
3
51
33
S
83
53
s
115
73
DC4
20
14
4
52
34
T
84
54
t
116
74
NAK
21
15
5
54
35
U
85
55
u
117
75
SYN
22
16
6
54
36
V
86
56
v
118
76
ETB
23
17
7
55
37
W
87
57
w
119
77
CAN
24
18
8
56
38
X
88
58
x
120
78
EM
25
19
9
57
39
Y
89
59
y
121
79
SUB
26
1A
:
58
3A
Z
90
5A
z
122
7A
ESC
27
1B
;
59
3B
[
91
5B
{
123
7B
FS
28
1C
<
60
3C
\
92
5C
|
124
7C
GS
29
1D
=
61
3D
]
93
5D
}
125
7D
RS
30
1E
>
62
3E
^
94
5E
~
126
7E
US
31
1F
?
63
3F
_
95
5F
DEL
127
7F
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
9-5
Character Sets
ASCII Character Set
Octal Values
Oct
9-6
Oct
Oct
Oct
NUL
000
SP
040
@
100
`
140
SOH
001
!
041
A
101
a
141
STX
002
"
042
B
102
b
142
ETX
003
#
043
C
103
c
143
EOT
004
$
044
D
104
d
144
ENQ
005
%
045
E
105
e
145
ACK
006
&
046
F
106
f
146
BEL
007
´
047
G
107
g
147
BS
010
(
050
H
110
h
150
HT
011
)
051
I
111
i
151
NL
012
*
052
J
112
j
152
VT
013
+
053
K
113
k
153
NP
014
,
054
L
114
l
154
CR
015
-
055
M
115
m
155
SO
016
.
056
N
116
n
156
SI
017
/
057
O
117
o
157
DLE
020
0
060
P
120
p
160
DC1
021
1
061
Q
121
q
161
DC2
022
2
062
R
122
r
162
DC3
023
3
063
S
123
s
163
DC4
024
4
064
T
124
t
164
NAK
025
5
065
U
125
u
165
SYN
026
6
066
V
126
v
166
ETB
027
7
067
W
127
w
167
CAN
030
8
070
X
130
x
170
EM
031
9
071
Y
131
y
171
SUB
032
:
072
Z
132
z
172
ESC
033
;
073
[
133
{
173
FS
034
<
074
\
134
|
174
GS
035
=
075
]
135
}
175
RS
036
>
076
^
136
~
176
US
037
?
077
_
137
DEL
177
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 10 • Keypad Configuration
This chapter describes the Twin Client key assignments applied to Symbol terminals
used in Twin Client advanced mode. The figures and tables identify the key assignments
by terminal model and emulation.
Adhesive decals that reflect the configurations described in this chapter are available for
Symbol terminals in each of the emulations (3270, 5250, and VT/HP).
Keypad Figures
The keypad figures in this section are designed to be of use without color. The
convention for describing the effect of modifier keys is as follows:
KEYTOP refers to the characters printed on the top of the key by the manufacturer.
Below the keytop is the key value for each of the available modifier keys. In this
example, the FUNC and CTRL keys are the modifiers.
In the example figure above, the keystroke generated in the un-modified state is an S.
The programmable function key PF19 is generated by pressing the FUNC modifier key
before pressing the S key, and a SREQ is generated by using the CTRL modifier key.
For the keymapping information for the 284x, 794x, 804x, 814x, 884x, 894x, and 9000
terminals, see the supported equipment documentation at
http://www.connectrf.com/ster.htm.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
10-1
Keypad Configuration
104x 27-key 3270
►
View →
◄
View ←
▲
Cntrst-Vw ↑
▼
Cntrst+Vw↓
FUNC
SHIFT
1
3
2
4
5
PF1 PF11 PF2 PF12 PF3 PF13 PF4 PF14 PF5 PF15
CTRL
$
@
%
!
#
7
8
9
0
6
PF6 PF16 PF7 PF17 PF8 PF18 PF9 PF19 PF10 PF20
CAPS
PURPLE
(
HELP
SPACE
PA1 PF21 PA2 PF22 PA3 PF23 Lamp PF24
^
TAB
&
CLEAR
*
MENU
GREEN
)
BKSP
ENTER
\
BkTab
104x 27-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
10-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
104x 27-key 5250
►
View →
◄
View ←
▲
Cntrst-Vw ↑
▼
Cntrst+Vw↓
FUNC
SHIFT
1
3
2
4
5
PF1 PF11 PF2 PF12 PF3 PF13 PF4 PF14 PF5 PF15
CTRL
$
%
#
7
8
9
0
6
PF6 PF16 PF7 PF17 PF8 PF18 PF9 PF19 PF10 PF20
@
!
CAPS
PURPLE
^
TAB
SPACE
(
MENU
HELP
PF23 Lamp PF24
*
&
CLEAR
Roll ↑ PF21 Roll ↓ PF22
GREEN
)
BKSP
\
ENTER
Fld-
BkTab
104x 27-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-3
Keypad Configuration
104x 27-key VT/HP
►
View →
◄
View ←
▲
Cntrst-Vw ↑
▼
Cntrst+Vw↓
FUNC
SHIFT
1
3
2
5
4
PF1 PF11 PF2 PF12 PF3 PF13 PF4 PF14 PF5 PF15
$
@
CTRL
%
!
#
7
8
9
0
6
PF6 PF16 PF7 PF17 PF8 PF18 PF9 PF19 PF10 PF20
CAPS
PURPLE
^
TAB
SPACE
&
CLEAR
*
MENU
(
HELP
Lamp
GREEN
)
BKSP
ENTER
\
BkTab
104x 27-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
10-4
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
►
FUNC
◄
▲
1
B
~
:
▼
(P)PURPLE
TAB
|
2
A
C
_
D
”
7
6
4
F
<
G
{
L
M
N
`
;
-
’
CLEAR
W
X
O
=
SReq
I
}
9
P
,
MENU
Y
Z
SHIFT
5
H
>
8
K
SPACE
U
V
3
E
+
EOF
Q
[
.
S
]
CTRL
CAPS
0
R
HELP
J
?
T
/
BKSP
(G)GREEN
ENTER
104x 27-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
Purple
Green
Func P
Func G
Ctrl P
Ctrl G
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-5
Keypad Configuration
►
FUNC
◄
▲
▼
(P)PURPLE
TAB
|
1
2
A
B
~
:
C
_
K
L
M
N
`
;
-
’
D
”
Attn
7
6
SPACE
U
V
CLEAR
W
X
3
E
+
Fexit
8
O
=
SReq
P
,
MENU
Y
Z
G
{
SHIFT
5
4
F
<
H
>
I
}
9
Q
R S
. ]
[
Help Reset
HELP
J
?
CTRL
CAPS
0
T
/
BKSP
(G)GREEN
ENTER
Fld -
Fld+
104x 27-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
Purple
Green
Func P
Func G
Ctrl P
Ctrl G
10-6
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
►
FUNC
◄
▲
1
B
~
:
C
_
K
L
`
;
▼
(P)PURPLE
TAB
|
3
2
A
D
”
E
+
M
N
-
’
O
=
7
6
SPACE
U
V
4
F
<
G
{
P
Q
[
8
CLEAR
W
X
I
}
R
S
]
9
,
MENU
Y
Z
SHIFT
5
H
>
CTRL
CAPS
0
.
HELP
J
?
T
/
BKSP
(G)GREEN
ENTER
104x 27-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
Purple
Green
Func P
Func G
Ctrl P
Ctrl G
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-7
Keypad Configuration
314x/384x 46-key 3270
CLR-ESC
[
~
`
SHF
FUNC
A
_
F
-
B
+
G
=
C
L
PF22
P
PF16
Q
PF17 Help
R
PF18
U
PF11
V
PF12
PF13
BKSP
BTb CntrstSpace
Z
PF7
7
:
.
} Contrast+
>
PF8
4
PF1
1
▲
Vw ↑ Vw ←
C Left
▼
Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
9
PF2
<
PF9
(
6
‘
PF6
2
0
,
^
3
PA2
PF3
@
!
PF10
Y
PF15
%
PA1
O
]
X
PF14
8
PF5
$
J
/
T
PF20
5
;
EOF
S
PF19 SReq
*
&
PF4
N
PF24
W
E
?
I
Insert
\
M
PF23
PWR
D
|
H
Home
K
PF21
Tab
CTL
PA3
#
ENTER
{
Lamp
)
314x / 384x 46-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC
CTL
SHF
10-8
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
314x/384x 46-key 5250
CLR-ESC
[
~
`
A
SHF
FUNC
_
Attn
F
-
B
+
G
=
CTL
C
D
|
H
Home
PWR
I
Insert
\
E
?
FExit
J
/
K
PF21 Fld+
L
PF22 Fld-
P
PF16
Q
PF17 Help
R
PF18 Reset
S
PF19 SReq
T
PF20
U
PF11
V
PF12
W
PF13
X
PF14 Erase
Y
PF15
▲
Vw ↑ Vw ←
C Left
▼
Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
Tab
BKSP
BTb CntrstSpace
Z
PF7
7
:
M
PF23
.
} Contrast+
>
PF8
8
9
;
6
PF5
‘
$
%
1
2
PF2 Roll Down
Roll Up
0
PF10
PF6
,
^
3
PF3
@
!
<
(
5
4
PF4
O
]
PF9
*
&
PF1
N
PF24
#
ENTER
{
Lamp
)
314x / 384x 46-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC
CTL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-9
Keypad Configuration
314x/384x 46-key VT/HP
CLR-ESC
[
Del
Esc
~
`
SHF
FUNC
A
_
F
-
K
B
+
CTL
C
D
|
H
G
L
M
E
?
I
Insert
\
=
PWR
J
/
N
O
]
P
PF16
Q
PF17
R
PF18
S
PF19
T
PF20
U
PF11
V
PF12
W
PF13
X
PF14
Y
PF15
▲
Vw ↑ Vw ←
C Left
▼
Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
Tab
BKSP
BTb CntrstSpace
Z
PF7
7
:
.
} Contrast+
>
PF8
4
PF5
PF2
PF6
3
2
PF3
0
{
,
^
@
!
PF10
6
‘
%
1
<
(
5
;
$
PF1
9
PF9
*
&
PF4
8
Lamp
#
ENTER
)
314x / 384x 46-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC
CTL
SHF
10-10
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
354x 47-key 3270
CLR
CTRL
A
~
_
E
`
IInsert
{
M
}
Q
&
PF8
;
PF5
$
2
↓
↑
PF9
9
‘
PF6
6
Btab
?
,
Tab
^
PA2 PF3
!
@
FUNC
PF10 Cntrst)
3
#
0
Bksp
<
(
%
PA1 PF2
PF16
Vw ↑ Vw ← Vw ↓ Vw →
←
→
8
5
X
W
*
4
T
PF15
Z
:
P
PF24
S
PF12
7
L
PF19 SReq PF20
V
Y
1
O
PF14
PF11
Home
]
PF23
R
U
H
\
K
[
PF18
PF13
PF1
J
D
|
G
=
N
PF17
PF4
F
PWR
C
+
PF22
PF21
PF7
B
-
EOF
SHF
Space
/
Enter
PA3 Lamp
.
Contrast+
>
354x 47-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-11
Keypad Configuration
354x 47-key 5250
→→→→→
CLR
CTRL
A
~
Attn
_
E
`
I
{
Insert
M
Q
H
\
Home
L
]
O
P
PF23
PF24
S
V
T
7
&
4
PF5
$
Roll ↑ PF2
!
FUNC
Vw ↑ Vw ← Vw ↓ Vw →
←
→
8
PF9
9
5
‘
6
PF6
%
^
2
3
Btab
,
Tab
Roll ↓ PF3
@
#
0
PF10 Cntrst)
Bksp
<
(
*
;
↓
↑
Z
PF8
PF16 Erase
PF15
PF12
:
X
W
PF14
Y
1
D
|
K
[
R
PF11
PF1
C
G
=
J
PWR
Help PF18 Reset PF19 SReq PF20
U
PF4
F
N
PF13
PF7
}
+
PF22
PF21
PF17
B
-
FExit
SHF
Fld-
Space
Fld+
/
Enter
Lamp
.
Contrast+
>
354x 47-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
10-12
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
354x 47-key VT/HP
CLR
Esc
CTRL
Del
A
~
_
E
`
J
M
N
Q
U
:
PF8
;
PF5
$
PF1
1
PF2
PF9
9
FUNC
<
(
6
PF6
‘
%
^
2
3
PF3
@
!
↓
↑
8
5
PF16
Vw ↑ Vw ← Vw ↓ Vw →
←
→
*
4
X
W
Z
7
T
PF20
PF15
PF12
&
PF4
S
V
Y
P
PF19
PF14
PF11
L
]
O
PF18
PF13
H
\
K
[
D
|
G
=
R
PF17
PWR
C
+
F
-
Insert }
PF7
B
I
{
SHF
?
,
#
0
PF10 Cntrst)
Bksp
Btab
Space
Tab
/
Enter
Lamp
.
Contrast+
>
354x 47-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTRL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-13
Keypad Configuration
SCAN
F3
F14
F13
{
A
▲
F18 Dark
View ↑
F
F23
K
F7
}
B
◄
F20
H
F19 Bk Tab
G View ←
7
F8
&
P
Reset
F5
F6
F5
C
[
D
<
F21
I
*
8
‘
N
F9
,
Q
SReq
F6
5
4
$
%
F2
U
V
!
BKSP
F11
\
FUNC
Help
ALPHA
^
3
ENTER
@
W
~
)
F12
:
Lamp
#
CLEAR
F10
+
|
CTRL
_
F3
0
?
F22
J
EOF
(
T
2
1
E
F7
SPACE
6
S
F1
9
]
/
_
>
M
F17
F16
.
►
Tab
Light F24
View ↓ L View →
R
X
F15
▼
O
F4
F4
Y
Z
`
=
;
614x, 31-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
10-14
FUNC
CTRL
ALPHA
FUNC CTRL
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
SCAN
F3
F13
F14
Attn
{
A
▲
F18 Dark
View ↑
F
F23
K
F7
}
B
◄
7
>
8
N
F9
SReq
F6
S
%
$
F2
F10
+
Y
F22
J
Fld +
\
CTRL
FUNC
Help
ALPHA
^
F3
@
W
0
Fld -
|
(
T
Roll ↓
V
!
9
FExit
E
_
6
2
Roll ↑
BKSP
X
M
?
‘
F7
SPACE
/
_
.
5
U
F11
*
F5
Reset
]
D
Q
P
R
1
[
,
&
Dup F17
F16
F20 Home F21
< I
H
F19 Bk Tab
G View ←
F8
F6
F5
C
►
Tab
Light F24
View ↓ L View →
4
F1
F15
▼
O
F4
F4
3
ENTER
:
Lamp
#
CLEAR
~
)
F12
Z
`
=
;
614x, 31-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
FUNC
CTRL
ALPHA
FUNC CTRL
10-15
Keypad Configuration
SCAN
F3
F14
F13
{
A
▲
F18 Dark
View ↑
F
F23
K
F7
}
B
◄
F19 Bk Tab
G View ←
F20
H
7
F8
&
[
D
<
F21
I
*
%
F2
U
V
!
BKSP
F11
+
Y
CTRL
ALPHA
^
@
W
~
)
F12
0
\
(
T
F3
F10
SPACE
FUNC
Q
2
1
F1
|
F22
J
9
F6
S
F7
E
_
6
F5
$
?
N
5
4
/Insert
‘
F9
,
]
_
>
M
F17
F16
.
8
P
F6
F5
C
►
Tab
Light F24
View ↓ L View →
R
X
F15
▼
O
F4
F4
3
ENTER
:
Lamp
#
CLEAR
Z
`
=
;
614x, 31-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC
CTRL
ALPHA
10-16
FUNC CTRL
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
614x 35-key 3270
PWR
SCAN
B
A
F
D
C
F20
F21
F22
~
+
{
F16
`
Home
F17
=
K
Insert
I
[
F24
|
J
F18
F19
]
\
CLEAR
N
M
L
EOF
}
H
G
F15
E
F23
View Left F11 ViewRightF12 View Up F13 ViewDownF14
◄
:
►
SPACE
Tab
<
O
7
PA1
,
U
F1
▼
S
Q
V
2
T
F5
6
F2
PA3
@
3
?
Contrast-F10
-
0
)
FUNC
F6
^
W
Y
ALPHA
F9
(
9
%
PA2
‘
F8
*
5
!
X
_
8
$
1
BKSP
Btab
P
F4
4
CTRL
“
F7
&
R
SHIFT
▲
;
F3
ENTER
LAMP
#
Z
Contrast+ /
.
>
614x 35-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
CTRL FUNC
NUM
ALT
NUM = ALPHA OFF
ALT = FUNC + CTRL
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-17
Keypad Configuration
614x 35-key 5250
PWR
SCAN
B
A
Attn
F
F21
F22
~
+
{
G
F16
`
=
F24
FExit
}
I
Home
F17
Insert
[
L
K
F23
H
F15
E
D
C
F20
|
J
F18
F19
]
\
N
M
CLEAR
View Left F11 ViewRightF12 View Up F13 ViewDownF14
◄
:
►
SPACE
Tab
Fld+
<
SHIFT
O
7
R
4
F4
U
1
BKSP
Btab Fld -
,
8
S
SReq
$
Roll Up F1
5
X
▼
‘
F8
Help
*
9
%
@
Y
?
Contrast-F10
-
0
)
F9
ALPHA
(
6
V
2
Q
T
F5
FUNC
F6
^
W
RollDownF2
!
Erase
“
P
F7
&
Reset
CTRL
▲
;
3
ENTER
F3
LAMP
#
Z
Contrast+ /
.
>
614x 35-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
CTRL FUNC
NUM
ALT
NUM = ALPHA OFF
ALT = FUNC + CTRL
10-18
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
614x 35-key VT/HP
PWR
SCAN
A
B
C
E
D
F20
~
F
{
+
G
F15
H
F16
`
=
I
F17
[
F18
|
J
\
CLEAR
N
Del
View Left F11 ViewRightF12 View Up F13 ViewDownF14
◄
:
►
SPACE
Tab
<
O
7
1
,
!
X
-
5
Q
T
6
Y
Contrast-F10
-
0
)
FUNC
F6
^
W
F2
?
ALPHA
F9
(
9
F5
@
2
Esc
‘
F8
%
V
F1
▼
*
S
$
U
BKSP
Btab
8
F4
4
CTRL
“
P
F7
&
R
SHIFT
▲
;
F19
]
M
L
K
}
3
F3
ENTER
LAMP
#
Z
Contrast+ /
.
>
614x 35-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
CTRL FUNC
NUM
ALT
NUM = ALPHA OFF
ALT = FUNC + CTRL
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-19
Keypad Configuration
Vterm-614x
~ A
_ B
a
Ctl
b
`
? E
F
= H
K
L
i
j
k
l
O F17
P F18
Q F19
q
o
p
U F11
V F12
u
v
&
$
g
W F13
w
F7
“
*
F8
‘
M
4
F5
N
m
n
R F20
S
T
r
s
t
X F14
Y F15
Z F16
x
y
z
<
(
F9
Fnc
9
%
Clr
h
8
F4
Esc Del
G
J
/
D
d
f
7
;
-
|
c
e
\ I
:
+ C
,
^
5
F6
Shf
6
Spc
}
!
F1
{
1
@
F2
]
2
#
F3
3
Bsp
↑◄←
▲
>
darken
.
tab
{
)
F10
0
lamp
lighten bktab
Enter
↓ ►→
▼
Ctl Shf Fnc
keytop
10-20
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
3270-614x
~ A attn
_ B pa1
+ C pa2
b
c
d
G
= H
g
h
a
Ctl
`
? E eof
F
e
\ I
:
/
f
J
K F23
L F24
i
j
k
l
O F17
P F18
o
p
V F12
u
v
$
sreq S F21
X F14
w
“
M
r
W F13
F7
x
*
F8
<
(
‘
4
F5
,
n
T F22
Y F15
Z F16
z
F9
^
5
N
t
Fnc
9
%
Clr
s
y
8
F4
D pa3
m
rst R F20
q
U F11
&
Q F19
7
;
-
|
F6
Shf
6
Spc
}
!
F1
{
1
@
F2
]
2
#
F3
3
Bsp
↑◄←
▲
>
darken
tab
.
{
)
F10
0
lamp
lighten bktab
Enter
↓ ►→
▼
Ctl Shf Fnc
keytop
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-21
Keypad Configuration
5250-614x
~ A attn
_ B
a
Ctl
b
`
? E fxt
/
i
rl↑ O F17
o
rl↓
:
G
d
fld-
Clr
= H help
g
h
K F23
L F24
M
N
j
k
l
m
n
rst R F20
sreq S F21
P F18
Q F19
q
U F11
V F12
u
v
$
D
J
W F13
w
F7
“
r
s
X F14
Y F15
x
*
7
;
-
f
p
&
|
c
F
e
\ I
+ C fld+
F8
<
‘
(
4
F5
,
Z F16
z
F9
Fnc
9
%
t
y
8
F4
T F22
^
F6
5
Shf
6
Spc
}
!
F1
{
1
@
F2
]
2
#
F3
3
Bsp
↑◄←
▲
>
darken
.
tab
{
)
F10
0
lamp
lighten bktab
Enter
↓ ►→
▼
Ctl Shf Fnc
keytop
10-22
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
684x 46-key 3270
FUNC
~
`
[
A
_
F
-
SHF
CLR
B
C
+
G
E
EOF
D
|
H
Home
=
PWR
CTL
?
I
Insert
\
J
/
O
K
PF21
L
PF22
M
PF23
N
PF24
P
PF16
Q
PF17
R
PF18
S
PF19 Sreq
T
PF20
U
PF11
V
PF12
W
PF13
X
PF14
Y
PF15
Tab
.
Z
BKSP
Btab Cntrst- { Contrast+
>
Space
8
7
:
PF7
PF5
;
PF4
5
‘
%
$
1
PF1
PA1
!
▼
▲
Vw ↑ Wv← Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
C Left
0
9
PF2
2
PA2
@
PF10
<
PF9
}
)
(
*
&
4
”
PF8
]
6
,
PF6
^
ENTER
Lamp
3
PF3
PA3
#
684x 46-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-23
Keypad Configuration
684x 46-key 5250
FUNC
~
`
A
[
_
Attn
F
-
SHF
CLR
B
C
+
G
?
I
Insert
\
N
PF24
M
K
L
PF21 Fld+ PF22 Fld- PF23
E
FExit
D
|
H
Home
=
PWR
CTL
J
/
]
O
P
PF16
T
S
R
Q
PF17 Help PF18 Reset PF19 SReq PF20
U
PF11
V
PF12
Tab
Y
X
PF14 Erase PF15
W
PF13
.
Z
BKSP
Btab Cntrst- { Contrast+
>
Space
8
7
:
PF8
;
PF5
PF7
”
4
5
‘
%
$
1
PF1 Roll Up
!
0
9
2
PF2 Roll Dn
@
PF10
<
PF9
}
)
(
*
&
PF4
▼
▲
Vw ↑ Wv← Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
C Left
6
,
PF6
^
ENTER
Lamp
3
PF3
#
684x 46-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTL
SHF
10-24
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
684x 46-key VT/HP
FUNC
~
`
[
A
_
F
-
K
SHF
CLR
Del
Esc
B
C
+
G
L
E
D
|
H
=
PWR
CTL
?
I
Insert
\
M
N
J
/
]
O
P
PF16
Q
PF17
R
PF18
S
PF19
T
PF20
U
PF11
V
PF12
W
PF13
X
PF14
Y
PF15
Tab
.
Z
BKSP
Btab Cntrst- { Contrast+
>
Space
8
7
:
PF8
;
PF5
PF7
4
5
1
‘
%
$
PF2
PF1
0
9
}
)
(
6
,
PF6
^
2
ENTER
Lamp
3
@
!
PF10
<
PF9
*
&
PF4
”
▼
▲
Vw ↑ Wv← Vw ↓ Vw →
C Right
C Left
PF3
#
684x 46-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FUNC CTL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-25
Keypad Configuration
F6
F1
F11
A
H
F18 Home
F7
F2
F12
F3
F5
F4
B
C
F13
I
F19 Insert
F20
D
F14
J
F
E
F15 EOF F16
L
K
F21
F23
F22
►
Vw →
◄
Vw ←
F9
F10
F8 54-key
39x0
3270
▲
Btab Vw ↑
G
F17
M
F7
7
:
&
F24
F4
`
O
+
P
|
W
V
=
Q
{
X
\
R
}
T
?
]
U
SHF
BKSP
ContrastSpace
_
F5
6
0
)
CLEAR
,
3
F3
PA3
#
.
Contrast+
>
394x 54-Key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
10-26
Twin Client Reference
CTL
^
2
PA2
@
F10
<
F6
‘
%
F2
PWR
(
*
;
-
F9
5
1
F1 PA1
!
/
Z
Y
[
S
FNC
9
8
F8
4
N
$
~
▼
Tab Vw ↓
• June, 2004
ENTER
Keypad Figures
394x 54-key 5250
F6
F1
A
F11 Attn
H
F18 Home
F7
F2
F12
F8
F3
B
F20
F5
F10
F4
C
F13
I
F19 Insert
F9
D
F
E
F15 FExit F16
F14
J
L
K
F21
Fld+ F22
►
Vw →
◄
Vw ←
Fld- F23
G
F17
M
▲
Btab Vw ↑
F7
:
&
F4
`
O
+
P
|
Q
Help
\
X
Erase
W
V
=
{
R
Reset
}
T
?
]
U
/
Z
Y
[
S
SReq
SHF
BKSP
ContrastSpace
1
F1 Roll ↑
!
_
-
F5
6
‘
F6
2
F2 Roll ↓
@
0
)
CTL
CLEAR
,
^
%
F10
<
(
*
;
PWR
9
F9
5
$
~
FNC
8
F8
4
N
F24
7
▼
Tab Vw ↓
3
F3
ENTER
#
.
Contrast+
>
394x 54-Key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-27
Keypad Configuration
394x 54-key VT/HP
F6
F1
F11
A
H
F18
F7
F2
F12
F8
F3
B
F4
C
F13
I
F19 Insert
F9
F20
F5
F10
D
F14
J
F15
E
F16
L
K
►
Vw →
◄
Vw ←
F
G
F17
M
▲
Btab Vw ↑
F7
7
&
F4
O
+
P
|
Q
{
R
}
S
T
?
U
/
`
W
V
=
X
\
Z
Y
[
]
SHF
BKSP
ContrastSpace
_
,
^
CLEAR
Del
Esc
3
ENTER
F6
%
2
F3
F2
-
CTL
6
‘
1
!
<
(
*
F5
PWR
9
F9
5
;
F1
FNC
8
F8
4
N
$
~
:
▼
Tab Vw ↓
@
F10
0
)
#
.
Contrast+
>
394x 54-Key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
10-28
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
694x 54-key 3270
F1
F6
F2
F3
F8
F7
B
A
F11
C
F12
F4
F9
F13
F14
D
F5
F10
BKSP
Contrast Space
E
F
F15 EOF F16
PWR
G
F17
◄
CTL
F7
7
:
F8
O
~
`
V
F20
P
+
=
J
F21
{
X
\
F22
R
Q
|
W
K
F23
M
F24
T
S
/
Z
]
F4
F1
1
!
FNC
SHF
$
_
F9
5
4
N
U
?
}
Y
[
L
View
→
9
*
&
I
H
F18 Home F19 Ins
►
View
←
8
;
PA1
F5
%
6
‘
2
F2 PA2
@
-
0
F10
)
(
F6
<
,
▲
Btb View ↑
▼
Tab View ↓
CLEAR
^
3
F3
PA3
#
ENTER
.
Contrast +
>
694x 54-key 3270 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
Note: Key re-mapping does not appear to work on this terminal. After a cold boot,
hit the key sequence Func+ Shift. This will take the terminal out of Caps
Lock state, and the key mapping will work as expected. It will stay latched in
this state until another cold boot is performed or another Func + Shift
sequence is performed.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-29
Keypad Configuration
F1
F2
F6
F7
A
F11 Attn
F12
F5
F4 5250
69x0F354-key
F8
B
~
`
V
C
F13
I
H
F18 Home F19 Ins
O
F9
F20
P
+
=
J
F14
D
E
F15 Fexit
K
L
F21 Fld + F22 Fld -
|
Q
Help
{
\
X
Erase
[
W
F10
R
Reset
}
S
Sreq
BKSP
Contrast Space
F
F23
]
F7
F17
M
F24
N
F4
7
/
_
F8
*
4
5
!
FNC
SHF
:
;
1
F1 Roll ↑
U
?
View
←
8
&
$
T
◄
CTL
G
F16
Z
Y
PWR
-
F5
View
→
9
<
F9
(
F6
‘
%
0
)
6
,
F3
3
#
.
Contrast+
>
694x 54-key 5250 Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
10-30
Twin Client Reference
Btb View ↑
▼
Tab View ↓
CLEAR
^
2
F2 Roll ↓
@
F10
▲
►
• June, 2004
ENTER
Keypad Figures
F1
F6
F2
B
A
F11
F18
C
F12
H
O
~
`
F3
F8
F7
V
F13
I
F19
Ins
F20
P
+
=
F14
E
F15
PWR
F
G
F16
F17
M
L
R
{
X
\
BKSP
F7
N
U
?
/
Z
Y
[
T
S
}
]
F1
7
_
:
F8
*
5
$
1
-
;
F5
F2
View
→
9
F9
4
%
2
@
F10
0
)
(
6
‘
▲
►
View
←
8
&
!
FNC
SHF
◄
CTL
F4
Q
W
D
K
J
|
F5
F4
Contrast F9 54-key
F10 VT/HP
69x0
Space
F6
<
,
^
3
F3
Btb View ↑
▼
Tab View ↓
CLEAR
Del
Esc
ENTER
#
.
Contrast +
>
694x 54-key VT Keyboard
KEYTOP
FNC
CTL
SHF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-31
Keypad Configuration
func
alpha
clear
shift
power
354x/684x VT
a
bksp
space
A
ctrl
{
b
[ A
‘
“
d
C
D
=
c
+
e
D
H
x
i
I
.
>
j
I
vw→
← M
J
<
7
F8
Q
8
4
l
L
bklite
T
l
vw↓
tab
↓ P
p
(
F9
R
9
5
^
U
F6
u
6
V
v
!
#
@
F2
w
S
s
F5
W
:
; L
%
t
1
|
\ K
r
$
F1
K
*
q
F4
k
o
&
F7
g
↑ O
n
_
- G
vw↑
light
G
F
k
→ N
m
g
?
f
j
vw← dark
F
/
, J
i
b
f
e
+ H
h
x
* E
d
h
E
}
] B
a
c C
B
2
F3
X
x
3
Y
y
)
lamp
Z
F10
0
enter
z
ctrl shift
shift shift+func
func
alpha
key =
shift
alpha+shift
10-32
alpha
alpha
shift+ctrl
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
func
alpha
clear
shift
354x/684x 3270
a
bksp
space
ctrl
‘
“
d
D
C
=
c
H
x
+
e
D
I
+ H
.
h
E
>
j
I
F8
Q
8
\ K
T
ereof
l
tab
↓ P
p
(
F9
R
9
5
^
U
F6
u
6
V
v
!
#
@
F2
w
S
s
F5
W
:
; L
%
t
1
L
bklite
vw↓
r
$
F1
l
*
q
4
|
o
&
F4
K
↑ O
n
_
- G
vw↑
light
G
F
k
→ N
m
7
k
j
← M
g
?
g
, J
vw→
F
/
<
}
] B
f
J
B
b
f
* E
i
vw← dark
F7
x
e
i
b
a
d
h
{
[ A
insert
c C
A
power
2
F3
X
x
3
Y
y
)
lamp
Z
F10
0
enter
z
ctrl shift shift+func
func
alpha
key =
shift
alpha+shift
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
alpha
alpha
shift+ctrl
10-33
Keypad Configuration
func
alpha
clear
shift
power
354x/684x 5250
attn
a A
insert
bksp
space
ctrl
{
b
[ A
‘
“
d
D
C
=
c
+
e
D
H
x
e
i
I
+ H
.
h
I
J
k
K
|
\ K
F8
8
vw↓
↓ P
p
*
sysreq
R
F9
9
5
U
F6
6
V
v
!
roll↓
W
F2
w
S
^
u
1
(
s
F5
t
roll↑
tab
%
T
:
; L
o
Q
L
bklite
l
r
4
l
↑ O
&
_
- G
vw↑
$
F1
F
k
n
G
g
, J
q
F4
g
?
f
<
→ N
m
F
/
fld ex
vw→ light
← M
7
f
j
vw← dark
F7
j
>
i
help
x
b
* E
d
h
E
}
] B
a
c C
B
#
@
2
F3
X
x
3
Y
y
)
lamp
Z
F10
0
enter
z
ctrl shift shift+func
func
alpha
key =
shift
alpha+shift
10-34
alpha
alpha
shift+ctrl
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
CLEAR
SCAN
SHIFT
View ↑
Linefeed
View ↓
#
View →
View ←
ENTER
$
"
!
Attn
Del ?
A
B
a
F
e
K
j
O
P
_
&
L
p
Q
%
PA1 F11
!
(
| F15
4
^
@
0
S
s
T
t
U
u
v
W
#
6
V
X
3
Y
x
CTRL
Bksp
.
FUNC CTRL
Shift
w
BkTab
Print
>
<
Clear
PA3 F13
2
n
Dup
F20
)
r
Bot
Top } F16
5
i
Sys req
“
R
q
N
m
Reset
9
PA2 F12
1
Info
h
M
l
F19
8
{ F14
$
H
Newl
F18
7
d
EREOF
k
~ F17
D
g
Null End
o
c
Help
G
f
:
LExit
C
Home
End
Insert
J
b
ErinP
EOF
E
FUNC
CTRL
Z
y
,
z
SHIFT FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key 3270 Keyboard
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-35
Keypad Configuration
SCAN
CLEAR
SHIFT
View ↑
Linefeed
View ↓
#
ENTER
$
View →
View ←
"
!
Attn
Del ?
A
B
a
F
e
K
j
G
f
_
O
P
L
k
p
Q
~ F17
&
(
%
4
^
5
F12
@
1
#
r
Bot
t
Clear
0
v
Fld +
X
CTRL
FUNC CTRL
Shift
u
w
BkTab
Y
x
Bksp
.
U
W
Print
>
s
Fld -
V
3
S
<
Dup
T
6
n
Sys req
“
R
q
N
m
Reset
} F16
i
Newl
F20
)
Info
h
M
l
F13
2
d
FM
9
Top
| F15
F11
!
H
F19
8
{ F14
$
g
F18
7
D
Help
Null End
o
c
EREOF
:
LExit
C
Home
End
Insert
J
b
ErinP
FExit
E
FUNC
CTRL
Z
y
,
z
SHIFT FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key 5250 Keyboard
10-36
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
SCAN
CLEAR
SHIFT
View ↑
Linefeed
View ↓
#
FUNC
CTRL
ENTER
$
View →
View ←
"
!
?
A
B
a
b
C
c
D
d
Help
E
F
e
f
G
g
H
h
Info
i
L
l
M
m
N
n
_
J
K
j
k
:
O
o
P
p
Q
~ F17
&
(
9
| F15
%
4
@
T
S
s
t
U
u
v
W
w
Y
y
Clear
} F16
^
5
6
V
F13
F12
1
r
F19
8
7
F11
!
R
q
F18
{ F14
$
<
“
2
#
Esc
X
3
x
,
F20
)
0
>
CTRL
Bksp
.
FUNC CTRL
Shift
Z
z
SHIFT FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key VT Keyboard
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-37
Keypad Configuration
CLEAR
Cap Lk
SCAN
SHIFT
#
ENTER
$
-
+
*
/
c
d
`
g
f
\
=
h
i
[
Lamp
k
j
"
!
b
a
e
FUNC
CTRL
]
m
l
;
n
,
‘
o
p
F7
F8
F4
F24
4
F1
F2
1
F22
F3
w
v
F23
Dark
3
Page ↓
0
Page ↑
6
2
F10
u
F6
5
F21
Ins
t
9
F5
s
/
F9
8
7
r
q
Light
y
x
Space
.
Bksp
FUNC
z
CTRL FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key 3270 Keyboard
10-38
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
Cap Lk
CLEAR
SCAN
SHIFT
FUNC
CTRL
Roll ↑
Roll ↓
#
ENTER
$
-
+
*
/
b
a
c
\
d
`
g
f
e
i
[
l
k
=
h
Lamp
j
"
!
]
n
m
;
,
‘
o
p
F7
q
F8
F4
F24
F1
F2
1
F3
2
F23
Dark
Light
y
Space
.
0
w
x
3
Page ↓
F10
v
6
F22
u
Page ↑
F6
5
F21
Ins
t
9
F5
4
/
F9
8
7
s
r
Bksp
FUNC
z
CTRL FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key 5250 Keyboard
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-39
Keypad Configuration
CLEAR
CapLk
SCAN
SHIFT
#
ENTER
$
-
+
*
/
c
d
`
g
f
k
=
i
h
[
Lamp
\
j
"
!
b
a
e
FUNC
CTRL
]
m
l
;
n
,
‘
o
p
F7
q
F8
7
F4
F24
F2
F21
6
F22
F3
2
1
0
u
Page ↑
w
v
F23
Dark
3
Light
y
x
Space
Page ↓
F10
t
Del
F6
5
4
F1
9
F5
s
/
F9
8
r
.
z
Bksp
FUNC
CTRL FUNC
Keytop
7500, 49-Key VT Keyboard
10-40
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
Esc Del
Clear
Shift
Vw ↑
Lamp
Vw ↓
Scan
$
_
~
A a
?
b
f
j
K
k
L
&
“
* F16
O o
P
p
e
J
c
D
=
_
F
E
|
C
G
"
!
+
B
`
Vw→
Vw ←
#
Func
Ctrl
d
\
g
H
h
Info
i
l
M m
N
n
/
:
}
!
‘
%
%
4
!
(
[
F1
1
)
)
F10
0
R
^
^
F2
@
T
#
#
V
>
F11
U
u
F13
v
F3
W w
F15
F14
X
3
Lighten
Bksp
.
s
F12
Darken
>
S
t
F6
6
]
2
→
r
F20
9
,
5
@
{
F5
F19
F18
F9
8
F4
$
F17
F8
7
;
(
Q q
F7
&
<
Y
x
y
.
Z
z
Ctrl Shift Func
Shift
Keytop
7500, 48-Key VT Keyboard
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-41
Keypad Configuration
Clear
Shift
Vw ↑
Lamp
Vw ↓
_
Attn
A a
?
Eof
E
Scan
$
~
e
b
F
f
g
F21
K
j
L
:
F7
&
*
$
‘
F4
!
!
<
[
F1
1
@
{
)
)
^
5
F6
#
>
u
F13
W w
F15
F14
X
Y
x
Lighten
Bksp
.
s
F11
U
v
Pa3
→Darken
F19
F12
V
3
n
>
t
Pa2
F3
S
F20
T
6
#
2
F10
0
]
F2
@
^
r
Pa1
9
N
F18 Sreq
R
F9
(
,
F24
M m
l
(
% F5
%
4
$
F8
i
F23
Q q
8
7
;
}
“
Info
h
F17 Reset
p
d
\
F22
k
P
D
H
F16
O o
c
=
_
/
J
|
C
G
"
!
+
B
`
Vw→
Vw ←
#
Func
Ctrl
y
.
Z
z
Ctrl Shift Func
Shift
Keytop
7500, 48-Key 3270 Keyboard
10-42
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
Clear
Shift
Roll↑
Vw ↑
Lamp
Roll↓
Vw ↓
#
~
A a
?
Fexit
E
Scan
_
Attn
e
b
f
/
g
F21
J
K
j
:
“
F7
L
&
7
; $
F4
$
4
}
(
‘
%
%
[
1
) F10
{
)
^
]
F2
R
0
>
r
F19
S
s
>
F11
U
t
V
u
F13
v
W w
F15
F14
F3
X
←
Y
x
Lighten
Bksp
.
n
F12
3
Darken
→
T
6
#
2
F24
N
F20
F6
#
i
F18 Sreq
Reset
9
^
5
@
@
,
F5
Info
h
F9
(
8
! F1
!
<
\
M m
Q q
F8
d
F23
l
F17
p
*
Help
F22
k
P
D
H
F16
O o
c
=
_
F
Fld+
|
C
G
"
!
+
B
`
Fld- Vw→
Vw ←
$
Func
Ctrl
y
.
Z
z
Ctrl Shift Func
Shift
Keytop
7500, 48-Key 5250 Keyboard
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-43
Keypad Configuration
7540, 35-key, 3270 Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
A
CTRL
ATTN
A
7
F
I
DUP
U
0
O
+
V
3
.
SYS REQUEST
S
CLR RFSH
‘
VIEW ←
L
!
P
"
LOCAL EXIT
F20
R
H $
6
F13
K
RESET
_
VIEW ↓
F16
END
POS
2
N
NULL END PA1
G
D #
9
HOME
5
NEWL
,
Q
C
F12
J
1
HELP BEGIN POS
M
8
INS
CHAR
F11
INFO
VIEW ↑
F19
FM ERINP F15
4
BKSP
F18
B
F14
E
ENTER
TOP
F17
EOF
s
*
T
EREOF PA2
DEL
W
/
BOT
\
X
=
;
BKTAB
Y
[
CTRL
Z
FUNC CTRL
SHIFT FUNC
ALPHA
10-44
]
SPACE
KEYTOP
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
7540, 35-key, 5250 Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
A
CTRL
ATTN
7
F
C
5
G
NEWL
F20
N
M
NULL END
DUP
O
S
CLR RFSH
U
V
W
/
VIEW ←
3
L
!
.
P
"
BOT
*
T
=
FLD +
\
X
PRINT ROLL ↓
[
CTRL
]
SPACE
Z
FUNC CTRL
SHIFT FUNC
ALPHA
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
F13
FLD -
BK TAB ROLL ↑
Y
H $
6
SYS REQUEST
+
R
VIEW ↓
LOCAL EXIT
0
RESET
_
K
D #
F16
END POS
F12
VIEW ↑ DEL CHAR
9
HOME
2
J
1
HELP BEGIN POS
Q
8
INS
CHAR
F11
I
F19
FM ERINP F15
4
BKSP
F18
B
FLD EXIT EREOF F14
E
ENTER
TOP
F17
A
s
KEYTOP
10-45
Keypad Configuration
7540, 35-key, VT Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
A
CTRL
s
7
B
C
F
I
G
J
H $
6
F12
1
VIEW ↓ HELP
F16
5
F11
D #
9
F15
4
VIEW ↑
F19
8
F14
E
BKSP
BOT F18
F17
A
ENTER
VIEW ←
F13
2
K
3
L
!
O
.
P
"
F20
M
,
N
0
TOP
RESET
Q
_
U
R
+
S
*
V
/
W
\
T
=
X
ESC BKTAB
Y
[
SPACE
CTRL
FUNC CTRL
ALPHA
10-46
Z
]
SHIFT FUNC
KEYTOP
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
7540, 35-key, 3270 Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
s
A
CTRL
F7
ENTER
F8
&
F9
*
7
(
8
F5
F4
$
F1
5
^
F2
!
<
6
$
Lamp
#
2
F10
Dark
#
F3
@
1
9
F6
%
4
BKSP
PA3
)
3
!
Light
0
View →
>
.
"
F24
_
_
+
F21
F22
~
?
+
*
=
F23
|
/
:
\
Tab
{
[
SPACE
FUNC
}
]
CTRL FUNC
Shift KEYTOP
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-47
Keypad Configuration
7540, 35-key, 5250 Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
A
CTRL
F7
s
ENTER
F8
&
F9
7
*
8
F5
F4
$
4
5
F2
!
^
6
$
Lamp
3
!
Light
)
<
#
#
2
F10
Dark
9
F3
@
1
(
F6
%
F1
BKSP
0
View →
>
.
"
F24
_
_
+
F21
F22
~
?
+
*
=
F23
|
/
:
\
Tab
{
[
SPACE
FUNC
}
]
CTRL FUNC
Shift KEYTOP
10-48
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Keypad Figures
7540, 35-key, VT Keyboard
ALPHA
FUNC
SCAN
SHIFT
CLEAR
A
CTRL
F7
s
F8
&
7
8
F5
$
4
5
F2
!
^
6
$
Lamp
3
!
Light
)
<
#
#
F10
Dark
9
F3
@ 2
1
(
F6
%
F1
BKSP
F9
*
F4
Del
ENTER
View →
>
0
.
"
*
+ =
F24
_ _
+
F21
F22
~
?
{
F23
|
/
\
SPACE
[
FUNC
:
}
]
CTRL FUNC
Shift KEYTOP
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-49
Keypad Configuration
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
The keypad tables in this section are organized by terminal model, keypad configuration,
and emulation. The key values represent the default Twin Client keypad assignments
applied to the terminal in Twin Client advanced mode.
Table entries that are blank indicate the key is not assigned, or not relevant to the
emulation.
104x 27-key
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CONTRAST CONTRAST +
CURSOR DOWN
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
DELETE
ENTER
ERASE FIELD
ERASE EOF
ERROR RESET
ESCAPE
FIELD ADVANCE
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
RETURN
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7
PF8
PF9
10-50
5250
<CTL><Purple><1>
<SHF><P1>
<BKSP>
<FNC><UP>
<FNC><DOWN>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
3270
VT/HP
OS
<SHF><P1>
<BKSP>
<FNC><UP>
<FNC><DOWN>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<SHF><P1>
<BKSP>
<FNC><UP>
<FNC><DOWN>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<BKSP>
<LEFT-ARROW>
<RIGHT-ARROW>
<LEFT><BKSP>
<ENTER>
<CTL><Purple><3>
<CTL><Green><9>
<CTL><Purple><P1>
<CTL><Purple><3>
<CTL><Purple><ENT>
<CTL><Purple><9>
<HELP>
<FNC><HELP>
<FNC><HELP>
<FNC><HELP>
<RIGHT><HELP>
<LEFT><HELP>
<ENTER>
<FNC><SPACE>
<FNC><CLEAR>
<SPACE>
<CTL><Purple><O>
<P1>
<CTL><DN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<SPACE>
<CTL><Purple><O>
<P1>
<CTL><DN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<FNC><SPACE>
<FNC><CLEAR>
<FNC><MENU>
<FNC><1>
<FNC><2>
<FNC><3>
<FNC><4>
<FNC><5>
<FNC><6>
<FNC><7>
<FNC><8>
<FNC><9>
<SPACE>
<SPACE>
<P1>
<CTL><DN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<LEFT><ENTER>
<FNC><1>
<FNC><2>
<FNC><3>
<FNC><4>
<FNC><5>
<FNC><6>
<FNC><7>
<FNC><8>
<FNC><9>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FNC><1>
<FNC><2>
<FNC><3>
<FNC><4>
<FNC><5>
<FNC><6>
<FNC><7>
<FNC><8>
<FNC><9>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
PF21
PF22
PF23
PF24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
'
apostrophe
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
`
grave accent
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
<FNC><0>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><5>
<CTL><6>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><8>
<CTL><9>
<CTL><0>
<CTL><SPACE>
<CTL><CLEAR>
<CTL><MENU>
<CTL><HELP>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FNC><Purple><7>
<FNC><Purple><3>
<FNC><Green><7>
<SHF><8>
<FNC><Green><8>
<FNC><Green><9>
<FNC><Green><0>
<FNC><Purple><9>
<FNC><ENTER>
<FNC><Purple><0>
<FNC><Purple><2>
<FNC><Purple><6>
<FNC><Green><1>
<FNC><Green><6>
<FNC><Green><3>
<FNC><Purple><8>
<FNC><Green><4>
<FNC><Green><5>
<FNC><Purple><4>
<FNC><Purple><P1>
<FNC><Purple><5>
<FNC><Purple><1>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<FNC><0>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><5>
<CTL><6>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><8>
<CTL><9>
<CTL><0>
<CTL><SPACE>
<CTL><CLEAR>
<CTL><MENU>
<CTL><HELP>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FNC><Purple><7>
<FNC><Purple><3>
<FNC><Green><7>
<SHF><8>
<FNC><Green><8>
<FNC><Green><9>
<FNC><Green><0>
<FNC><Purple><9>
<FNC><ENTER>
<FNC><Purple><0>
<FNC><Purple><2>
<FNC><Purple><6>
<FNC><Green><1>
<FNC><Green><6>
<FNC><Green><3>
<FNC><Purple><8>
<FNC><Green><4>
<FNC><Green><5>
<FNC><Purple><4>
<FNC><Purp><P1>
<FNC><Purple><5>
<FNC><Purple><1>
<FNC><0>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><5>
<CTL><6>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><8>
<CTL><9>
<CTL><0>
<FUNC><0>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FNC><Purple><7>
<FNC><Purple><3>
<FNC><Green><7>
<SHF><8>
<FNC><Green><8>
<FNC><Green><9>
<FNC><Green><0>
<FNC><Purple><9>
<FNC><ENTER>
<FNC><Purple><0>
<FNC><Purple><2>
<FNC><Purple><6>
<FNC><Green><1>
<FNC><Green><6>
<FNC><Green><3>
<FNC><Purple><8>
<FNC><Green><4>
<FNC><Green><5>
<FNC><Purple><4>
<FNC><Purp><P1>
<FNC><Purple><5>
<FNC><Purple><1>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<FNC><LEFT><P1>
<SHF><FNC><ENT>
<FNC><LEFT><1>
<SHF><8>
<FNC><LEFT><2>
<SHF><FUNC><LEFT><BS>
<FNC><LEFT><3>
<FNC><LEFT><4>
<FNC><LEFT><9>
<FNC><LEFT><5>
<SHF><FNC><LEFT><P1>
<FNC><LEFT><7>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><6>
<FNC><LEFT><6>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><2>
<FNC><ENTER>
<SHF><RIGHT><P1>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><3>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><4>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><9>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><5>
<SHF><FNC><LEF><7>
10-51
Keypad Configuration
314x/384x/684x 46-key
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CONTRAST CONTRAST +
CURSOR DOWN
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
DELETE
ENTER
ERASE FIELD
ERASE EOF
ERROR RESET
ESCAPE
FIELD ADVANCE
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
NEWLINE
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
RETURN
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7
PF8
PF9
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
10-52
5250
<CTRL><A>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP-ARROW>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><X>
3270
VT/HP
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP-ARROW>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP-ARROW>
<CTL><CLR>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
OS
<BKSP>
<FUNC><UP
<FUNC><DN>
<FUNC><V>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><E>
<CTRL><R>
<SHF><CLR>
<CTL><K>
<CTL><E>
<CTL><L>
<CTL><Q>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<ENTER>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><1>
<SHF><BKSP>
<CTL><S>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<CTL><ENTER>
<FUNC><PERIOD>
<FUNC><W>
<ENTER>
<SHF><BKSP>
<CTL><S>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<SHF><BKSP>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
PF21
PF22
PF23
PF24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
'
apostrophe
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
`
grave accent
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><CLR>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><F>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><0>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><.>
<FUNC><A>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<FUNC><K
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><CLR>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><F>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><0>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><.>
<FUNC><A>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><CLR>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><F>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><0>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><.>
<FUNC><A>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<SHF><FUNC><B>
<SHF><FUNC><A>
<FUNC><R>
<SHF><8>
<FUNC><S>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><O>
<FUNC><O>
<SHF><FUNC><S>
<FUNC><I>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><FUNC><T>
<SHF><FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><J>
<SHF><FUNC><M>
<SHF><FUNC><N>
10-53
Keypad Configuration
354x 47-key
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CONTRAST CONTRAST +
CURSOR DOWN
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
DELETE
ENTER
ERASE FIELD
ERASE EOF
ERROR RESET
ESCAPE
FIELD ADVANCE
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
RETURN
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7
PF8
PF9
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
PF21
10-54
5250
<CTRL><A>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><0>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><X>
3270
VT/HP
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><0>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><0>
<CTRL><.>
<DN-ARROW>
<SHF><UP>
<SHF><DN>
<UP>
<CTL><CLR>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
OS
<BKSP>
<FUNC><UP
<FUNC><DN>
<FUNC><V>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><E>
<CTRL><R>
<SHF><CLR>
<CTL><SPACE>
<CTL><E>
<CTL><BKSP>
<CTL><Q>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<ENTER>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><1>
<SPACE>
<CTL><S>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><M>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<FUNC><PERIOD>
<FUNC><W>
<ENTER>
<SPACE>
<CTL><S>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><M>
<SPACE>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DN>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><DOWN>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
PF22
PF23
PF24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
'
apostrophe
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
`
grave accent
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
<FUNC><N>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<SHF><SPACE>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><G>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><BKSP>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<FUNC><N>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<SHF><SPACE>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><G>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><BKSP>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><C>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<SHF><SPACE>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><E>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><G>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><BKSP>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<SHF><FUNC><B>
<SHF><FUNC><A>
<FUNC><R>
<SHF><8>
<FUNC><S>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><O>
<FUNC><O>
<SHF><FUNC><S>
<FUNC><I>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><FUNC><T>
<SHF><FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><J>
<SHF><FUNC><M>
<SHF><FUNC><N>
10-55
Keypad Configuration
614x 35-key
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CONTRAST CONTRAST +
CURSOR DOWN
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
DELETE
ENTER
ERASE FIELD
ERASE EOF
ERROR RESET
ESCAPE
FIELD PLUS
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
NEWLINE
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
RETURN
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7
PF8
PF9
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
10-56
5250
<CTRL><A>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><Y>
<CTRL><Z>
<DN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><X>
3270
VT/HP
<CTRL><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><Y>
<CTRL><Z>
<DN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><Y>
<CTRL><Z>
<DN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<FUNC><CLEAR>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
OS
<BKSP>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><X>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><E>
<CTRL><R>
<ALT><CLR>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<CTRL><E>
<ALT><BKSP>
<CTRL><Q>
<CTRL><H>
<CTRL><I>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><V>
<CTRL><U>
<SPACE>
<CTL><S>
<CTRL><SPACE>
<CTRL><N>
<CTRL><K>
<CTRL><L>
<CTRL><M>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
<CTRL><H>
<CTRL><I>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<FUNC><L>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<SPACE>
<SPACE>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><SPACE>
<CTRL><N>
<CTRL><K>
<CTRL><L>
<CTRL><M>
<CTRL><U>
<CTRL><V>
<CTRL><W>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
<CTRL><SPACE>
<CTRL><N>
<CTRL><K>
<CTRL><L>
<CTRL><M>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><K>
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><A>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><V>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><O>
<FUNC><P>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><Y>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><B>
PF21
<FUNC><C>
<FUNC><C>
PF22
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><D>
PF23
<FUNC><E>
<FUNC><E>
PF24
<ALT><U>
<ALT><U>
!
exclamation
<ALT><V>
@
at sign <ALT><V>
<ALT><W>
#
pound <ALT><W>
<ALT><R>
$
dollar <ALT><R>
<ALT><S>
<ALT><S>
%
percent
<ALT><T>
<ALT><T>
^
carat
<ALT><O>
<ALT><O>
&
ampersand
<ALT><Q>
<ALT><Q>
(
left parenthesis
<ALT><Y>
) right parenthesis <ALT><Y>
<ALT><X>
<ALT><X>
dash
<ALT><B>
<ALT><B>
+
plus
<ALT><N>
<ALT><N>
'
apostrophe
<ALT><P>
*
asterisk <ALT><P>
<ALT><BKSP>
<ALT><BKSP>
,
comma
<NUM><Z>
<NUM><Z>
.
period
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><Z>
/
forward slash
<ALT><H>
<ALT><H>
[
left bracket
<ALT><J>
<ALT><J>
\
back slash
<ALT><I>
<ALT><I>
]
right bracket
<NUM><X>
<NUM><X>
_
underline
<ALT><F>
`
grave accent <ALT><F>
<ALT><K>
:
colon <ALT><K>
<ALT><L>
;
semi-colon <ALT><L>
<ALT><SPACE>
<ALT><SPACE>
<
less than
<ALT><G>
<ALT><G>
=
equal
<ALT><Z>
<ALT><Z>
>
greater than
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><X>
?
question
<ALT><C>
{
left brace <ALT><C>
<ALT><E>
|
vertical bar <ALT><E>
<ALT><D>
}
right brace <ALT><D>
<ALT><A>
<ALT><A>
~
tilde
<ALT> = <FUNC><CTRL>
<NUM>= <ALPHA> OFF
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<ALT><U>
<ALT><V>
<ALT><W>
<ALT><R>
<ALT><S>
<ALT><T>
<ALT><O>
<ALT><Q>
<ALT><Y>
<ALT><X>
<ALT><B>
<ALT><N>
<ALT><P>
<ALT><BKSP>
<NUM><Z>
<FUNC><Z>
<ALT><H>
<ALT><J>
<ALT><I>
<NUM><X>
<ALT><F>
<ALT><K>
<ALT><L>
<ALT><SPACE>
<ALT><G>
<ALT><Z>
<FUNC><X>
<ALT><C>
<ALT><E>
<ALT><D>
<ALT><A>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<SHF><J>
<NUM><C>
<NUM><E>
<NUM><G>
<NUM><Z>
<NUM><F>
<NUM><A>
<NUM><H>
<NUM><B>
<SHF><X>
<FUNC><B>
<SHF><I>
<NUM><I>
<SHF><G>
<NUM><D>
<SHF><Z>
<SHF><F>
<SHF><A>
<SHF><H>
<SHF><B>
10-57
Keypad Configuration
394x/694x 54-key
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CONTRAST CONTRAST +
CURSOR DOWN
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
DELETE
ENTER
ERASE FIELD
ERASE EOF
ERROR RESET
ESCAPE
FIELD ADVANCE
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
RETURN
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7
PF8
PF9
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
PF21
10-58
5250
<CTRL><A>
<FUNC><UP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><X>
3270
VT/HP
<FUNC><UP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<FUNC><UP>
<BKSP>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><.>
<DOWN>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<UP>
<CTL><CLR>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
OS
<BKSP>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><I>
<LEFT>
<RIGHT>
<FUNC><V>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><E>
<CTRL><R>
<SHF><CLR>
<CTL><K>
<CTL><E>
<CTL><L>
<CTL><Q>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<ENTER>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><1>
<SHF><BKSP>
<CTL><S>
<FUNC><DOWN>
<CTL><DOWN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><A>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><C>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><E>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><K>
<CTL><H>
<CTL><I>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><I>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<FUNC><.>
<FUNC><W>
<ENTER>
<SHF><BKSP>
<SHF><BKSP>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><DOWN>
<CTL><DOWN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<CTL><1>
<CTL><2>
<CTL><3>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><A>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><C>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><E>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><K
<FUNC><DOWN>
<CTL><DOWN>
<CTL><LEFT>
<CTL><RIGHT>
<CTL><UP>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><A>
<FUNC><B>
<FUNC><C>
<FUNC><D>
<FUNC><E>
<FUNC><F>
<FUNC><G>
<FUNC><H>
<FUNC><I>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
PF22
PF23
PF24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
'
apostrophe
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
`
grave accent
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><->
<FUNC><V>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><W>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><O>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<FUNC><L>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><->
<FUNC><V>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><W>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><O>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><P>
<CTL><5>
<SHF><8>
<CTL><6>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><U>
<FUNC><Y>
<FUNC><X>
<FUNC><Z>
<FUNC><->
<FUNC><V>
<CTL><7>
<CTL><4>
<CTL><9>
<FUNC><W>
<SHF><.>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><R>
<FUNC><Q>
<FUNC><S>
<FUNC><O>
<SHF><1>
<SHF><2>
<SHF><3>
<SHF><4>
<SHF><5>
<SHF><6>
<SHF><7>
<SHF><9>
<SHF><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><R>
<SHF><8>
<FUNC><S>
<PERIOD>
<FUNC><T>
<FUNC><M>
<FUNC><J>
<FUNC><N>
<SHF><FUNC><K>
<FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><O>
<FUNC><O>
<SHF><FUNC><S>
<FUNC><I>
<SHF><.>
<SHF><FUNC><T>
<SHF><FUNC><H>
<SHF><FUNC><J>
<SHF><FUNC><M>
<SHF><FUNC><N>
10-59
Keypad Configuration
614x, 31-key, 5250,3270,VT/HP
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
CLEAR
DARK
DOWN
DUP
ENTER
ERASE EOF
FIELD PLUS
FIELD EXIT
FIELD MINUS
HELP
HOME
INSERT
LAMP
LEFT
LIGHT
RESET
RIGHT
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
UP
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
F1
F2
10-60
5250
<CTRL><F3>
<CTRL><LEFT>
<BKSP>
<CLEAR>
<CTRL><UP>
<DOWN>
<CTRL><F6>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><SPACE>
<CTRL><F7>
<CTRL><BKSP>
<CTRL><9>
<CTRL><*>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<LEFT>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<CTRL><4>
<RIGHT>
<CTRL><2>
<CTRL><1>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><5>
<CTRL><RIGHT>
<UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>><UP>
<ALPHA><F3>
<ALPHA><F4>
<ALPHA><F5>
<ALPHA><F6>
<ALPHA><F7>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><*>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><SPACE>
<ALPHA>< DOWN>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><BKSP>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><CLEAR>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
3270
VT/HP
<CTRL><LEFT>
<BKSP>
<CLEAR>
<CTRL><UP>
<DOWN>
<CTRL><LEFT>
<BKSP>
<CLEAR>
<CTRL><UP>
<DOWN>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><F7>
<ENTER>
<CTRL><9>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<LEFT>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<CTRL><4>
<RIGHT>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><5>
<CTRL><RIGHT>
<UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>><UP>
<ALPHA><F3>
<ALPHA><F4>
<ALPHA><F5>
<ALPHA><F6>
<ALPHA><F7>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><*>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><SPACE>
<ALPHA>< DOWN>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><BKSP>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><CLEAR>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<CTRL></>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<LEFT>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<RIGHT>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><RIGHT>
<UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>><UP>
<ALPHA><F3>
<ALPHA><F4>
<ALPHA><F5>
<ALPHA><F6>
<ALPHA><F7>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><*>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><SPACE>
<ALPHA>< DOWN>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><BKSP>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><CLEAR>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
KEY
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
'
apostrophe
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
`
grave accent
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
5250
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><CLEAR>
<FUNC><F3>
<FUNC><F4>
<FUNC><F5>
<FUNC><F6>
<FUNC><F7>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<FUNC><*>
<FUNC></>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DOWN>
<FUNC><RITE>
<FUNC><CTRL><1>
<FUNC><CTRL><2>
<FUNC><CTRL><3>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<FUNC><CTRL><9>
<FUNC><CTRL><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><CTRL><BKSP>
<FUNC><DASH>
<*>
<FUNC><CTRL><8>
<PERIOD>
</>
<FUNC><CTRL><F5>
<FUNC><CTRL><SPACE>
<FUNC><CTRL><F6>
<FUNC><CTRL><DASH>
<CTRL><CLEAR>
<FUNC><ENTER
<FUNC><CTRL><ENTER>
<FUNC><CTRL><*>
<FUNC><CTRL><CLEAR>
3270
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><CLEAR>
<FUNC><F3>
<FUNC><F4>
<FUNC><F5>
<FUNC><F6>
<FUNC><F7>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<FUNC><*>
<FUNC></>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DOWN>
<FUNC><RITE>
<FUNC><CTRL><1>
<FUNC><CTRL><2>
<FUNC><CTRL><3>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<FUNC><CTRL><9>
<FUNC><CTRL><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><CTRL><BKSP>
<FUNC><DASH>
<*>
<FUNC><CTRL><8>
<PERIOD>
</>
<FUNC><CTRL><F5>
<FUNC><CTRL><SPACE>
<FUNC><CTRL><F6>
<FUNC><CTRL><DASH>
<CTRL><CLEAR>
<FUNC><ENTER
<FUNC><CTRL><ENTER>
<FUNC><CTRL><*>
<FUNC><CTRL><CLEAR>
VT/HP
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<FUNC><CLEAR>
<FUNC><F3>
<FUNC><F4>
<FUNC><F5>
<FUNC><F6>
<FUNC><F7>
<FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<FUNC><*>
<FUNC></>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<FUNC><DOWN>
<FUNC><RITE>
<FUNC><CTRL><1>
<FUNC><CTRL><2>
<FUNC><CTRL><3>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<FUNC><CTRL><9>
<FUNC><CTRL><0>
<DASH>
<FUNC><CTRL><BKSP>
<FUNC><DASH>
<*>
<FUNC><CTRL><8>
<PERIOD>
</>
<FUNC><CTRL><F5>
<FUNC><CTRL><SPACE>
<FUNC><CTRL><F6>
<FUNC><CTRL><DASH>
<CTRL><CLEAR>
<FUNC><ENTER
<FUNC><CTRL><ENTER>
<FUNC><CTRL><*>
<FUNC><CTRL><CLEAR>
<FUNC><CTRL><PERIOD>
<FUNC><CTRL><PERIOD>
<FUNC><CTRL><PERIOD>
<FUNC><CTRL></>
<FUNC><CTRL><F3>
<FUNC><CTRL><F7>
<FUNC><CTRL><F4>
<CTRL><0>
<FUNC><CTRL></>
<FUNC><CTRL><F3>
<FUNC><CTRL><F7>
<FUNC><CTRL><F4>
<CTRL><0>
<FUNC><CTRL></>
<FUNC><CTRL><F3>
<FUNC><CTRL><F7>
<FUNC><CTRL><F4>
<CTRL><0>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-61
Keypad Configuration
614x, 46-key, 5250,3270,VT/HP
Key
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Clear
Backtab
Tab
Esc
Space
Shift
Func
Ctrl
10-62
VTERM
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><I>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<Clr>
<Fnc><Enter>
<Fnc><.>
<Shf><Clr>
<Shf><Bsp>
<Shf>
<Fnc>
<Ctl>
3270
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><I>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<Clr>
<Fnc><Enter>
<Fnc><.>
--<Shf><Bsp>
<Shf>
<Fnc>
<Ctl>
5250
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><I>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<Clr>
<Fnc><Enter>
<Fnc><.>
--<Shf><Bsp>
<Shf>
<Fnc>
<Ctl>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
Backspace
Enter
Del
Lamp
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
*
asterisk
(
left parenthesis
)
right parenthesis
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
/
forward slash
`
accent
hyphen
=
equal sign
[
left bracket
]
right bracket
\
backward slash
;
semicolon
‘
apostrophe
,
comma
.
period
~
tilde
_
underscore
+
addition sign
{
left brace
}
right brace
<Bsp>
<Enter>
<Fnc><Clr>
<Ctl><Enter>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><8>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Fnc><1>
<Fnc><2>
<Fnc><3>
<Fnc><4>
<Fnc><5>
<Fnc><6>
<Fnc><7>
<Fnc><8>
<Fnc><9>
<Fnc><0>
<Fnc><u>
<Fnc><v>
<Fnc><w>
<Fnc><x>
<Fnc><y>
<Fnc><z>
<Fnc><o>
<Fnc><p>
<Fnc><q>
<Fnc><r>
--------<Ctl><j>
<Ctl><f>
<Ctl><g>
<Ctl><h>
<Ctl><2>
<Ctl><3>
<Ctl><i>
<Ctl><4>
<Ctl><5>
<Ctl><6>
<.>
<Ctl><a>
<Ctl><b>
<Ctl><c>
<Ctl><0>
<Ctl><1>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<Bsp>
<Enter>
--<Ctl><Enter>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><8>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Fnc><1>
<Fnc><2>
<Fnc><3>
<Fnc><4>
<Fnc><5>
<Fnc><6>
<Fnc><7>
<Fnc><8>
<Fnc><9>
<Fnc><0>
<Fnc><u>
<Fnc><v>
<Fnc><w>
<Fnc><x>
<Fnc><y>
<Fnc><z>
<Fnc><o>
<Fnc><p>
<Fnc><q>
<Fnc><r>
<Fnc><s>
<Fnc><t>
<Fnc><k>
<Fnc><l>
<Ctl><j>
<Ctl><f>
<Ctl><g>
<Ctl><h>
<Ctl><2>
<Ctl><3>
<Ctl><i>
<Ctl><4>
<Ctl><5>
<Ctl><6>
<.>
<Ctl><a>
<Ctl><b>
<Ctl><c>
<Ctl><0>
<Ctl><1>
<Bsp>
<Enter>
--<Ctl><Enter>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><8>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Fnc><1>
<Fnc><2>
<Fnc><3>
<Fnc><4>
<Fnc><5>
<Fnc><6>
<Fnc><7>
<Fnc><8>
<Fnc><9>
<Fnc><0>
<Fnc><u>
<Fnc><v>
<Fnc><w>
<Fnc><x>
<Fnc><y>
<Fnc><z>
<Fnc><o>
<Fnc><p>
<Fnc><q>
<Fnc><r>
<Fnc><s>
<Fnc><t>
<Fnc><k>
<Fnc><l>
<Ctl><j>
<Ctl><f>
<Ctl><g>
<Ctl><h>
<Ctl><2>
<Ctl><3>
<Ctl><i>
<Ctl><4>
<Ctl><5>
<Ctl><6>
<.>
<Ctl><a>
<Ctl><b>
<Ctl><c>
<Ctl><0>
<Ctl><1>
10-63
Keypad Configuration
|
broken vertical bar
:
colon
“
quotation mark
<
less-than sign
>
greater-than sign
?
question mark
EOF
Pa1
Pa2
Pa3
Roll up
Roll down
▲ (Cursor up)
▼ (Cursor down)
► (Cursor right)
◄ (Cursor left)
↑ (View up)
↓ (View down)
→ (View right)
← (View left)
Lighten
Darken
Attention
Field exit
Help
Field Field +
Reset
Sys req
10-64
<Ctl><d>
<Ctl><7>
<Ctl><8>
<Ctl><9>
<Ctl><.>
<Ctl><e>
------------<▲>
<▼>
<Shf><▼>
<Shf><▲>
<Ctl><▲>
<Ctl><▼>
<Fnc><▼>
<Fnc><▲>
<Shf><Enter>
<Shf><.>
---------------
<Ctl><d>
<Ctl><7>
<Ctl><8>
<Ctl><9>
<Ctl><.>
<Ctl><e>
<Fnc><e>
<Fnc><b>
<Fnc><c>
<Fnc><d>
----<▲>
<▼>
<Shf><▼>
<Shf><▲>
<Ctl><▲>
<Ctl><▼>
<Fnc><▼>
<Fnc><▲>
<Shf><Enter>
<Shf><.>
<Fnc><a>
--------<Ctl><r>
<Ctl><s>
<Ctl><d>
<Ctl><7>
<Ctl><8>
<Ctl><9>
<Ctl><.>
<Ctl><e>
--------<Ctl><o>
<Ctl><u>
<▲>
<▼>
<Shf><▼>
<Shf><▲>
<Ctl><▲>
<Ctl><▼>
<Fnc><▼>
<Fnc><▲>
<Shf><Enter>
<Shf><.>
<Fnc><a>
<Fnc><e>
<Fnc><h>
<Fnc><g>
<Fnc><c>
<Ctl><r>
<Ctl><s>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
354x/684x Table
Key
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Space
Clear
Shift
Alpha
Ctrl
Func
Backspace
Enter
VTERM
<alpha><shift><A>
<alpha><shift><B>
<alpha><shift><C>
<alpha><shift><D>
<alpha><shift><E>
<alpha><shift><F>
<alpha><shift><G>
<alpha><shift><H>
<alpha><shift><I>
<alpha><shift><J>
<alpha><shift><K>
<alpha><shift><L>
<alpha><shift><M>
<alpha><shift><N>
<alpha><shift><O>
<alpha><shift><P>
<alpha><shift><Q>
<alpha><shift><R>
<alpha><shift><S>
<alpha><shift><T>
<alpha><shift><U>
<alpha><shift><V>
<alpha><shift><W>
<alpha><shift><X>
<alpha><shift><Y>
<alpha><shift><Z>
<alpha><A>
<alpha><B>
<alpha><C>
<alpha><D>
<alpha><E>
<alpha><F>
<alpha><G>
<alpha><H>
<alpha><I>
<alpha><J>
<alpha><K>
<alpha><L>
<alpha><M>
<alpha><N>
<alpha><O>
<alpha><P>
<alpha><Q>
<alpha><R>
<alpha><S>
<alpha><T>
<alpha><U>
<alpha><V>
<alpha><W>
<alpha><X>
<alpha><Y>
<alpha><Z>
<space>
<clear>
<shift>
<alpha>
<ctrl>
<func>
<bksp>
<enter>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3270
<alpha><shift><A>
<alpha><shift><B>
<alpha><shift><C>
<alpha><shift><D>
<alpha><shift><E>
<alpha><shift><F>
<alpha><shift><G>
<alpha><shift><H>
<alpha><shift><I>
<alpha><shift><J>
<alpha><shift><K>
<alpha><shift><L>
<alpha><shift><M>
<alpha><shift><N>
<alpha><shift><O>
<alpha><shift><P>
<alpha><shift><Q>
<alpha><shift><R>
<alpha><shift><S>
<alpha><shift><T>
<alpha><shift><U>
<alpha><shift><V>
<alpha><shift><W>
<alpha><shift><X>
<alpha><shift><Y>
<alpha><shift><Z>
<alpha><A>
<alpha><B>
<alpha><C>
<alpha><D>
<alpha><E>
<alpha><F>
<alpha><G>
<alpha><H>
<alpha><I>
<alpha><J>
<alpha><K>
<alpha><L>
<alpha><M>
<alpha><N>
<alpha><O>
<alpha><P>
<alpha><Q>
<alpha><R>
<alpha><S>
<alpha><T>
<alpha><U>
<alpha><V>
<alpha><W>
<alpha><X>
<alpha><Y>
<alpha><Z>
<space>
<clear>
<shift>
<alpha>
<ctrl>
<func>
<bksp>
<enter>
5250
<alpha><shift><A>
<alpha><shift><B>
<alpha><shift><C>
<alpha><shift><D>
<alpha><shift><E>
<alpha><shift><F>
<alpha><shift><G>
<alpha><shift><H>
<alpha><shift><I>
<alpha><shift><J>
<alpha><shift><K>
<alpha><shift><L>
<alpha><shift><M>
<alpha><shift><N>
<alpha><shift><O>
<alpha><shift><P>
<alpha><shift><Q>
<alpha><shift><R>
<alpha><shift><S>
<alpha><shift><T>
<alpha><shift><U>
<alpha><shift><V>
<alpha><shift><W>
<alpha><shift><X>
<alpha><shift><Y>
<alpha><shift><Z>
<alpha><A>
<alpha><B>
<alpha><C>
<alpha><D>
<alpha><E>
<alpha><F>
<alpha><G>
<alpha><H>
<alpha><I>
<alpha><J>
<alpha><K>
<alpha><L>
<alpha><M>
<alpha><N>
<alpha><O>
<alpha><P>
<alpha><Q>
<alpha><R>
<alpha><S>
<alpha><T>
<alpha><U>
<alpha><V>
<alpha><W>
<alpha><X>
<alpha><Y>
<alpha><Z>
<space>
<clear>
<shift>
<alpha>
<ctrl>
<func>
<bksp>
<enter>
10-65
Keypad Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
↑
←
↓
→
Backlight
Lighten
Darken
?
question mark
/
forward slash
hyphen
=
equal sign
[
left bracket
]
right bracket
\
backward slash
;
semicolon
‘
apostrophe
,
comma
.
period
_
underscore
+
addition sign
{
left brace
}
right brace
|
broken vertical bar
:
colon
“
quotation mark
<
less-than sign
>
greater-than sign
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
*
asterisk
(
left parenthesis
)
right parenthesis
Tab
Roll Down
Roll Up
PA1
PA2
PA3
Attention
10-66
<alpha> <1>
<alpha> <2>
<alpha> <3>
<alpha> <4>
<alpha> <5>
<alpha> <6>
<alpha> <7>
<alpha> <8>
<alpha> <9>
<alpha> <0>
<func><1>
<func><2>
<func><3>
<func><4>
<func><5>
<func><6>
<func><7>
<func><8>
<func><9>
<func><0>
<↑>
<←>
<↓>
<→>
<func><;>
<shift><N>
<shift><M>
<shift><func><F>
<shift><F>
<shift><G>
<shift><D>
<shift><A>
<shift><B>
<shift><K>
<shift><L>
<shift><C>
<shift><J>
<shift><I>
<shift><func><G>
<shift><H>
<shift><func><A>
<shift><func><B>
<shift><func><K>
<shift><func><L>
<shift><func><C>
<shift><func><J>
<shift><func><I>
<shift><func><W>
<shift><func><X>
<shift><func><Y>
<shift><func><T>
<shift><func><U>
<shift><func><V>
<shift><func><Q>
<shift><E>
<shift><func><S>
<shift><func><Z>
<shift><func><P>
<alpha> <1>
<alpha> <2>
<alpha> <3>
<alpha> <4>
<alpha> <5>
<alpha> <6>
<alpha> <7>
<alpha> <8>
<alpha> <9>
<alpha> <0>
<func><1>
<func><2>
<func><3>
<func><4>
<func><5>
<func><6>
<func><7>
<func><8>
<func><9>
<func><0>
<↑>
<←>
<↓>
<→>
<func><;>
<shift><N>
<shift><M>
<shift><func><F>
<shift><F>
<shift><G>
<shift><D>
<shift><A>
<shift><B>
<shift><K>
<shift><L>
<shift><C>
<shift><J>
<shift><I>
<shift><func><G>
<shift><H>
<shift><func><A>
<shift><func><B>
<shift><func><K>
<shift><func><L>
<shift><func><C>
<shift><func><J>
<shift><func><I>
<shift><func><W>
<shift><func><X>
<shift><func><Y>
<shift><func><T>
<shift><func><U>
<shift><func><V>
<shift><func><Q>
<shift><E>
<shift><func><S>
<shift><func><Z>
<shift><func><P>
<alpha> <1>
<alpha> <2>
<alpha> <3>
<alpha> <4>
<alpha> <5>
<alpha> <6>
<alpha> <7>
<alpha> <8>
<alpha> <9>
<alpha> <0>
<func><1>
<func><2>
<func><3>
<func><4>
<func><5>
<func><6>
<func><7>
<func><8>
<func><9>
<func><0>
<↑>
<←>
<↓>
<→>
<func><;>
<shift><N>
<shift><M>
<shift><func><F>
<shift><F>
<shift><G>
<shift><D>
<shift><A>
<shift><B>
<shift><K>
<shift><L>
<shift><C>
<shift><J>
<shift><I>
<shift><func><G>
<shift><H>
<shift><func><A>
<shift><func><B>
<shift><func><K>
<shift><func><L>
<shift><func><C>
<shift><func><J>
<shift><func><I>
<shift><func><W>
<shift><func><X>
<shift><func><Y>
<shift><func><T>
<shift><func><U>
<shift><func><V>
<shift><func><Q>
<shift><E>
<shift><func><S>
<shift><func><Z>
<shift><func><P>
<ctrl>< x>
<ctrl><w>
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
<ctrl><A>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
Erase Field
Sys Request
Insert
Field Exit
Erase EOF
View Up
View Down
View Left
View Right
Lamp
Home
Help
<shift><ctrl><space>
<ctrl><o>
<ctrl><p>
<ctrl><m>
<ctrl><n>
<func><Enter>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<shift><ctrl><L>
<ctrl><o>
<ctrl><p>
<ctrl><m>
<ctrl><n>
<func><Enter>
Not supported
<ctrl><s>
<shift><space>
<shift><ctrl><E>
<ctrl><o>
<ctrl><p>
<ctrl><m>
<ctrl><n>
<func><Enter>
Not supported
<ctrl><7>
10-67
Keypad Configuration
7540,35 key, 5250,3270,VT/HP
KEY
ATTENTION
BACK TAB
BACKSPACE
BEGIN POS
BOT
CLEAR
DARK
DELETE
DEL CHAR
DOWN
DUP
END POS
EOF
EREOF
ERINP
ESCAPE
FIELD +
FIELD EXIT
FIELD FM
HELP
HOME
INFO
INSCHAR
LAMP
LEFT
LIGHT
LOCAL EXIT
NEWL
NULL END
REFRESH
RIGHT
PRINT
RESET
ROLL DOWN
ROLL UP
SCAN
SPACE
SYS REQUEST
TAB
TOP
UP
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
VIEW UP
PA1
PA2
PA3
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
10-68
5250
<CTRL><7>
<CTRL><[>
<BKSP>
<FUNC><CTRL><COMMA>
<CTRL><=>
<CTRL></>
<FUNC><COMMA>
<FUNC><CTRL><UP>
<DOWN>
<CTRL><’>
<CTRL><3>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
3270
<CTRL><7>
<CTRL><[>
<BKSP>
<FUNC><CTRL><COMMA>
<CTRL><=>
<CTRL></>
<FUNC><COMMA>
<CTRL><;>
VT/HP
<DOWN>
<CTRL><’>
<CTRL><3>
<CTRL><4>
<CTRL><\>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><[>
<BKSP>
<FUNC><CTRL><8>
<FUNC><COMMA>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<CTRL><[>
<CTRL><;>
<CTRL><4>
<CTRL><\>
<CTRL><5>
<CTRL><COMMA>
<CTRL><6>
<CTRL><2>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<LEFT>
<FUNC><PERIOD>
<CTRL><PERIOD>
<CTRL><0>
<CTRL><DASH>
<FUNC><CTRL></>
<RIGHT>
<CTRL><]>
<CTRL><+>
<FUNC><CTRL><]>
<FUNC><CTRL><[>
<SCAN>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><*>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<CTRL><8>
<UP>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<CTRL><LEFT>
<CTRL><FUNC><RIGHT>
<CTRL><UP>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><DOWN>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
<CTRL><5>
<CTRL><COMMA>
<CTRL><6>
<CTRL><1>
<CTRL><2>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<LEFT>
<FUNC><PERIOD>
<CTRL><PERIOD>
<CTRL><0>
<CTRL><DASH>
<FUNC><CTRL></>
<RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><LEFT>
<LEFT>
<FUNC><PERIOD>
<RIGHT>
<CTRL><+>
<FUNC><CTRL><+>
<SCAN>
<SPACE>
<CTRL><*>
<FUNC><SPACE>
<CTRL><8>
<UP>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<CTRL><LEFT>
<CTRL><FUNC><RIGHT>
<CTRL><UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><->
<FUNC><CTRL><\>
<CTRL><FUNC><0>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><DOWN>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
<SCAN>
<SPACE>
<FUNC><CTRL><=>
<UP>
<CTRL><DOWN>
<CTRL><LEFT>
<CTRL><FUNC><RIGHT>
<CTRL><UP>
<ALPHA><7>
<ALPHA><8>
<ALPHA><9>
<ALPHA><UP>
<ALPHA><4>
<ALPHA><5>
<ALPHA><6>
<ALPHA><DOWN>
<ALPHA><1>
<ALPHA><2>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
KEY
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
) right parenthesis
dash
+
plus
5250
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><COMMA>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><+>
<ALPHA><ASTERISK>
<ALPHA><=>
<ALPHA><’>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><\>
<ALPHA><;>
<ALPHA><[>
<ALPHA><]>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<->
<SHIFT><=>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3270
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><COMMA>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><+>
<ALPHA><ASTERISK>
<ALPHA><=>
<ALPHA><’>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><\>
<ALPHA><;>
<ALPHA><[>
<ALPHA><]>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<->
<SHIFT><=>
VT/HP
<ALPHA><3>
<ALPHA><LEFT>
<ALPHA><COMMA>
<ALPHA><0>
<ALPHA><PERIOD>
<ALPHA><RITE>
<ALPHA><HYPHEN>
<ALPHA><+>
<ALPHA><ASTERISK>
<ALPHA><=>
<ALPHA><’>
<ALPHA></>
<ALPHA><\>
<ALPHA><;>
<ALPHA><[>
<ALPHA><]>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<->
<SHIFT><=>
10-69
Keypad Configuration
KEY
'
apostrophe
~
tilde
`
grave accent
*
asterisk
,
comma
.
period
/
forward slash
[
left bracket
\
back slash
]
right bracket
_
underline
:
colon
;
semi-colon
<
less than
=
equal
“
quote
>
greater than
?
question
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
5250
<’>
<SHIFT><`>
<`>
<SHIFT><8>
<COMMA>
<PERIOD>
</>
<[>
<\>
<]>
<SHIFT><->
<SHIFT><;>
<;>
<SHIFT><COMMA>
<=>
<SHIFT><’>
<SHIFT><PERIOD>
<SHIFT></>
<SHIFT><[>
<SHIFT><\>
<SHIFT><]>
3270
<’>
<SHIFT><`>
<`>
<SHIFT><8>
<COMMA>
<PERIOD>
</>
<[>
<\>
<]>
<SHIFT><->
<SHIFT><;>
<;>
<SHIFT><COMMA>
<=>
<SHIFT><’>
<SHIFT><PERIOD>
<SHIFT></>
<SHIFT><[>
<SHIFT><\>
<SHIFT><]>
VT/HP
<’>
<SHIFT><`>
<`>
<SHIFT><8>
<COMMA>
<PERIOD>
</>
<[>
<\>
<]>
<SHIFT><->
<SHIFT><;>
<;>
<SHIFT><COMMA>
<=>
<SHIFT><’>
<SHIFT><PERIOD>
<SHIFT></>
<SHIFT><[>
<SHIFT><\>
<SHIFT><]>
Note: Full 8859 character set not supported.
10-70
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
7500 48-Key
Key
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5250
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
3270
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
VT
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<Shift><a>
<Shift><b>
<Shift><c>
<Shift><d>
<Shift><e>
<Shift><f>
<Shift><g>
<Shift><h>
<Shift><j>
<Shift><k>
<Shift><l>
<Shift><m>
<Shift><n>
<Shift><o>
<Shift><p>
<Shift><q>
<Shift><r>
<Shift><s>
<Shift><t>
<Shift><u>
<Shift><v>
<Shift><w>
<Shift><x>
<Shift><y>
<Shift><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
10-71
Keypad Configuration
0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
SCAN
CLEAR
SHIFT
CTRL
FUNC
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
PERIOD
BKSP
ATTN
EOF
FEXIT
RESET
FIELDFIELD+
ESC
HELP
VIEW UP
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
LIGHTEN
DARKEN
LAMP
PA1
PA2
PA3
DEL
SYSREQ
ROLL UP
ROLL DOWN
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
10-72
<0>
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
<Func><4>
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
<Func><7>
<Func><8>
<Func><9>
<Func><0>
<Func><u>
<Func><v>
<Func><w>
<Func><x>
<Func><y>
<Func><p>
<Func><q>
<Func><r>
<Func><s>
<Func><t>
<Func><k>
<Func><l>
<Func><m>
<Func><n>
<Scan>
<Clear>
<Shift>
<Ctrl>
<Func>
<▲>
<▼>
<◄>
<►>
<Ctrl><z>
<Bksp>
<Func><a>
<Func><e>
<Func><r>
<Func><◄>
<Func><►>
<0>
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
<Func><4>
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
<Func><7>
<Func><8>
<Func><9>
<Func><0>
<Func><u>
<Func><v>
<Func><w>
<Func><x>
<Func><y>
<Func><p>
<Func><q>
<Func><r>
<Func><s>
<Func><t>
<Func><k>
<Func><l>
<Func><m>
<Func><n>
<Scan>
<Clear>
<Shift>
<Ctrl>
<Func>
<▲>
<▼>
<◄>
<►>
<Ctrl><z>
<Bksp>
<Func><a>
<Func><e>
<0>
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
<Func><4>
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
<Func><7>
<Func><8>
<Func><9>
<Func><0>
<Func><u>
<Func><v>
<Func><w>
<Func><x>
<Func><y>
<Func><p>
<Func><q>
<Func><r>
<Func><s>
<Func><t>
<Scan>
<Clear>
<Shift>
<Ctrl>
<Func>
<▲>
<▼>
<◄>
<►>
<Ctrl><z>
<Bksp>
<Func><r>
<Shift><Clear>
<Func><h>
<Ctrl><▲>
<Ctrl><▼>
<Ctrl><◄>
<Ctrl><►>
<Func><.>
<Func><Bksp>
<Ctrl><Scan>
<Ctrl><▲>
<Ctrl><▼>
<Ctrl><◄>
<Ctrl><►>
<Func><.>
<Func><Bksp>
<Ctrl><Scan>
<Func><t>
<Func><v>
<Func><x>
<Ctrl><▲>
<Ctrl><▼>
<Ctrl><◄>
<Ctrl><►>
<Func><.>
<Func><Bksp>
<Ctrl><Scan>
<Func><Clear>
<Ctrl><s>
<Func><▲>
<Func><▼>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Ctrl><s>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
&
(
)
+
*
`
=
\
[
]
;
‘
,
/
{
|
}
~
?
_
:
“
<
>
ampersand
left parenthesis
right parenthesis
addition sign
hyphen
asterisk
grave accent
equal sign
backward slash
left bracket
right bracket
semicolon
apostrophe
comma
forward slash
left brace
vertical bar
right brace
tilde
question mark
underscore
colon
quote
less than sign
greater than sign
<Shift><7>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Ctrl><c>
<Ctrl><b>
<Shift><8>
<Ctrl><f>
<Ctrl><h>
<Ctrl><i>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
<Ctrl><5>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><j>
<Ctrl><0>
<Ctrl><d>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><a>
<Ctrl><e>
<Ctrl><g>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Ctrl><u>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Ctrl><c>
<Ctrl><b>
<Shift><8>
<Ctrl><f>
<Ctrl><h>
<Ctrl><i>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
<Ctrl><5>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><j>
<Ctrl><0>
<Ctrl><d>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><a>
<Ctrl><e>
<Ctrl><g>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Ctrl><u>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Ctrl><c>
<Ctrl><b>
<Shift><8>
<Ctrl><f>
<Ctrl><h>
<Ctrl><i>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
<Ctrl><5>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><j>
<Ctrl><0>
<Ctrl><d>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><a>
<Ctrl><e>
<Ctrl><g>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Ctrl><u>
Note: Full 8859 character set not supported.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
10-73
Keypad Configuration
7500 49-Key
Key
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10-74
5250
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<SHIFT><a>
<SHIFT><b>
<SHIFT><c>
<SHIFT><d>
<SHIFT><e>
<SHIFT><f>
<SHIFT><g>
<SHIFT><h>
<SHIFT><j>
<SHIFT><k>
<SHIFT><l>
<SHIFT><m>
<SHIFT><n>
<SHIFT><o>
<SHIFT><p>
<SHIFT><q>
<SHIFT><r>
<SHIFT><s>
<SHIFT><t>
<SHIFT><u>
<SHIFT><v>
<SHIFT><w>
<SHIFT><x>
<SHIFT><y>
<SHIFT><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
3270
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<SHIFT><a>
<SHIFT><b>
<SHIFT><c>
<SHIFT><d>
<SHIFT><e>
<SHIFT><f>
<SHIFT><g>
<SHIFT><h>
<SHIFT><j>
<SHIFT><k>
<SHIFT><l>
<SHIFT><m>
<SHIFT><n>
<SHIFT><o>
<SHIFT><p>
<SHIFT><q>
<SHIFT><r>
<SHIFT><s>
<SHIFT><t>
<SHIFT><u>
<SHIFT><v>
<SHIFT><w>
<SHIFT><x>
<SHIFT><y>
<SHIFT><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
VT
<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>
<i>
<j>
<k>
<l>
<m>
<n>
<o>
<p>
<q>
<r>
<s>
<t>
<u>
<v>
<w>
<x>
<y>
<z>
<SHIFT><a>
<SHIFT><b>
<SHIFT><c>
<SHIFT><d>
<SHIFT><e>
<SHIFT><f>
<SHIFT><g>
<SHIFT><h>
<SHIFT><j>
<SHIFT><k>
<SHIFT><l>
<SHIFT><m>
<SHIFT><n>
<SHIFT><o>
<SHIFT><p>
<SHIFT><q>
<SHIFT><r>
<SHIFT><s>
<SHIFT><t>
<SHIFT><u>
<SHIFT><v>
<SHIFT><w>
<SHIFT><x>
<SHIFT><y>
<SHIFT><z>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Keypad Tables
0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
SCAN
CLR (TAB)
SHIFT
CTRL
FUNC
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
PERIOD
ENTER
SPACE
BKSP
POWER
ATTN
EOF
FEXIT
HOME
INFO
INSERT
END
EREOF
FM
NEWL
LEXIT
NULLEND
RESET
BOT
DUP
CLEAR
FIELDFIELD+
BKTAB
PRINT
TOP
LINEFEED
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SCAN>
<CLR>
<SHIFT>
<CTRL>
<FUNC>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><.>
<#>
<$>
<!>
<">
<.>
<ENTER>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<POWER>
<CTRL><a>
<CTRL><e>
<CTRL><g>
<SHIFT><i>
<CTRL><j>
<CTRL><k>
<CTRL><l>
<CTRL><m>
<CTRL><n>
<CTRL><o>
<CTRL><q>
<CTRL><r>
<CTRL><t>
<CTRL><u>
<CTRL><v>
<CTRL><w>
<CTRL><x>
<CTRL><y>
<CTRL><z>
<CTRL><6>
<CTRL><ENTER>
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SCAN>
<CLR>
<SHIFT>
<CTRL>
<FUNC>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><.>
<#>
<$>
<!>
<">
<.>
<ENTER>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<POWER>
<CTRL><a>
<CTRL><e>
<CTRL><g>
<SHIFT><i>
<CTRL><j>
<CTRL><k>
<CTRL><l>
<0>
<FUNC><1>
<FUNC><2>
<FUNC><3>
<FUNC><4>
<FUNC><5>
<FUNC><6>
<FUNC><7>
<FUNC><8>
<FUNC><9>
<FUNC><0>
<SHIFT><FUNC><1>
<SHIFT><FUNC><2>
<SHIFT><FUNC><3>
<SHIFT><FUNC><4>
<SHIFT><FUNC><5>
<SHIFT><FUNC><6>
<SHIFT><FUNC><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><8>
<SHIFT><FUNC><9>
<SHIFT><FUNC><0>
<CTRL><FUNC><1>
<CTRL><FUNC><2>
<CTRL><FUNC><3>
<CTRL><FUNC><4>
<SCAN>
<CLR>
<SHIFT>
<CTRL>
<FUNC>
<FUNC><W>
<FUNC><.>
<#>
<$>
<!>
<">
<.>
<ENTER>
<FUNC><BKSP>
<BKSP>
<POWER>
<SHIFT><i>
<CTRL><n>
<CTRL><o>
<CTRL><q>
<CTRL><r>
<CTRL><t>
<CTRL><u>
<CTRL><v>
<CTRL><y>
<CTRL><z>
<CTRL><6>
<CTRL><ENTER>
<CTRL><ENTER>
10-75
Keypad Configuration
ESC
HELP
VIEW UP
VIEW DOWN
VIEW LEFT
VIEW RIGHT
ALT
LIGHT
DARK
LAMP
PA1
PA2
PA3
DEL
ERINP
SYSREQ
ROLL UP
ROLL DOWN
CAPS LOCK
!
exclamation
@
at sign
#
pound
$
dollar
%
percent
^
carat
&
ampersand
(
left parenthesis
)
right parenthesis
+
addition
subtraction
*
multiplication
/
division
`
grave accent
=
equal sign
\
backward slash
[
left bracket
]
right bracket
;
semicolon
‘
apostrophe
,
comma
/
forward slash
{
left brace
|
vertical bar
}
right brace
~
tilde
?
question mark
_
underscore
:
colon
“
quote
<
less than sign
>
greater than sign
<FUNC><CTRL><h>
<FUNC><CTRL><UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><h>
<FUNC><CTRL><UP>
<CTRL><y>
<FUNC><CTRL><h>
<FUNC><CTRL><UP>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><DOWN>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>
<FUNC><y>
<FUNC><x>
<FUNC><l>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>
<FUNC><y>
<FUNC><x>
<FUNC><l>
<FUNC><CTRL><1>
<FUNC><CTRL><2>
<FUNC><CTRL><3>
<FUNC><CTRL><d>
<FUNC><CTRL><f>
<FUNC><CTRL><u>
<FUNC><CTRL><LEFT>
<FUNC><CTRL><RIGHT>
<FUNC><CTRL>
<FUNC><y>
<FUNC><x>
<FUNC><l>
<FUNC><SHIFT>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<FUNC><a>
<FUNC><b>
<FUNC><c>
<FUNC><d>
<FUNC><h>
<FUNC><i>
<FUNC><j>
<FUNC><m>
<FUNC><n>
<FUNC><o>
<FUNC><r>
<FUNC><s>
<FUNC><t>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><d>
<SHIFT><FUNC><k>
<SHIFT><FUNC><o>
<SHIFT><FUNC><r>
<SHIFT><FUNC><s>
<SHIFT><.>
<FUNC><SHIFT>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<FUNC><a>
<FUNC><b>
<FUNC><c>
<FUNC><d>
<FUNC><h>
<FUNC><i>
<FUNC><j>
<FUNC><m>
<FUNC><n>
<FUNC><o>
<FUNC><r>
<FUNC><s>
<FUNC><t>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><d>
<SHIFT><FUNC><k>
<SHIFT><FUNC><o>
<SHIFT><FUNC><r>
<SHIFT><FUNC><s>
<SHIFT><.>
<FUNC><CTRL><d>
<FUNC><CTRL><f>
<FUNC><CTRL><u>
<CTRL><FUNC><UP>
<FUNC><v>
<CTRL><FUNC><DOWN>
<FUNC><SHIFT>
<SHIFT><1>
<SHIFT><2>
<SHIFT><3>
<SHIFT><4>
<SHIFT><5>
<SHIFT><6>
<SHIFT><7>
<SHIFT><9>
<SHIFT><0>
<FUNC><a>
<FUNC><b>
<FUNC><c>
<FUNC><d>
<FUNC><h>
<FUNC><i>
<FUNC><j>
<FUNC><m>
<FUNC><n>
<FUNC><o>
<FUNC><r>
<FUNC><s>
<FUNC><t>
<FUNC><CTRL><4>
<FUNC><CTRL><5>
<FUNC><CTRL><6>
<FUNC><CTRL><7>
<SHIFT><FUNC><d>
<SHIFT><FUNC><k>
<SHIFT><FUNC><o>
<SHIFT><FUNC><r>
<SHIFT><FUNC><s>
<SHIFT><.>
Note: Full 8859 character set not supported.
10-76
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Symbol Terminal Control Sequences
Symbol Terminal Control Sequences
Command Mode Boot
Terminal Model & Keypad
284x
314x 35-key
614x 35-key
314x 46-key, 354x 47-key,
384x 46-key, 684x 46-key
104x 27-key
394x
694x
754x
794x (to suspend or resume
operation)
804x
814x
884x
894x (to suspend or resume
operation)
9000
Key Sequence - Following Power Off
none
Hold Bksp and Shift keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release Bksp and Shift keys.
Hold F and I keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release F and I keys.
Hold Enter and Func keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release Enter and Func keys.
Hold A and D keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release A and D keys.
Press and hold PWR and Scan keys.
Wait for a beep.
Release PWR and Scan keys.
Press PWR button 1 to 6 seconds.
none
none
none
Press PWR button 1 to 6 seconds.
none
Cold Boot
Terminal Model & Keypad
284x
314x 35-key
614x 35-key
314x 46-key, 354x 47-key,
384x 46-key, 684x 46-key
104x 27-key
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Key Sequence - Following Power Off
Remove the battery cover. While holding down
the function button, use the stylus to gently press
the reset button. Replace the battery cover and
press the power button. The symbol splash screen
will display for about a minute. When the
welcome screen appears, tap anywhere on the
screen to continue to the align screen.
Hold Space, Func and Up-Arrow keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release Space, Func and Up-Arrow keys.
Hold down A, B and D keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release A, B and D keys.
Hold Right-Arrow and Enter keys.
10-77
Keypad Configuration
394x 54-key
694x 54-key
754x
794x
804x
814x
884x
894x
9000
Press and release PWR.
Release Right-Arrow and Enter keys.
Hold F1, F4 and Enter keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release F1, F4 and Enter keys.
none
Press PWR button 15 seconds or more.
http://www.connectrf.com/Documents/8040.pdf
Press Func (blue key on terminal front) and
White button (in battery compartment on right
side of battery) at same time.
http://www.connectrf.com/Documents/8800.pdf
Press PWR button 15 seconds or more.
Press and hold the PWR key for 15 seconds.
Warm Boot
Terminal Model & Keypad
284x
314x 35-key
614x 35-key
314x 46-key
354x 47-key
384x 46-key
684x 46-key
104x 27-key
394x 54-key
694x 54-key
754x
794x
804x
814x
884x
894x
9000
10-78
Key Sequence - Following Power Off
Hold down both the up and down scroll buttons
and press the App 4 button.
Hold / and + keys.
Press and release On/Off.
Release / and + keys.
Hold 4 and 5 keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release 4 and + keys.
Hold P1 and Enter keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release P1 and Enter keys.
Hold Shift and L keys.
Press and release PWR.
Release Shift and L keys.
none
Press PWR button 6 to 15 seconds.
Press and hold the PWR key (for approximately
10 seconds) and release it as soon as the screen
changes and the terminal begins to reboot.
Press Backlight, Func (blue key), and Down
Arrow keys all at the same time.
Press the Enter and Function keys while holding
down either the left or right scan trigger and then
release the keys.
Press PWR button 6 to 15 seconds.
Press and hold the PWR key for 5 seconds.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 11 • Error Message Resolution Guide
Twin Client Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
ENTRY TOO LONG;
Trying to key beyond the field size.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
ALPHABETIC ONLY;
Trying to key a character that is not
alphabetic.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
MINUS NOT VALID;
Trying to key a Minus sign.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
DECIMAL NOT VALID;
Trying to key a Decimal (period).
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
ALPHANUMERIC ONLY;
Trying to key characters other than
Alphabetic and numeric.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
NUMERIC ONLY;
Trying to key characters other than
numeric.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
ENTRY TOO SHORT;
Trying to exit the field before it is filled.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-1
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
INVALID KEY;
The key pressed is not valid.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
MUST CLEAR FIELD;
Trying to enter data in a field that must
be cleared first.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
SCAN NOT ALLOWED;
Trying to scan into a key only field.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
KEY NOT ALLOWED;
Trying to key into a scan only field.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
ENTRY TOO SHORT;
Trying to exit the field before it is filled.
Ensure that you are entering input into the
correct field.
---
RECOVERABLE ERROR;
Encountered an error from which you can Verify your configuration settings for the
continue.
hardware being used, usually a printer and
cable issue.
---
UNRECOVERABLE ERROR; Encountered an error from which you can Verify your Network settings are correct and
NOT continue.
you are in the correct mode using the correct
Port.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
FUNCTION: \n\nFILE: \nLINE: Encountered an error from which you can Notify Connect over the WEB incident
\nCODE;
NOT continue.
reporting system.
---
Press any key\nFor More
Details...;
Press Enter for more information.
Advisory message.
---
Press any key;
Press a key to continue.
Advisory message.
---
11-2
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
Connection
Could not Connect.
ERROR.\nREBOOT MOBILE
UNIT;
Verify your Network settings are correct and
you are in the correct mode using the correct
Port.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Disconnect
Could not Disconnect.
ERROR.\nREBOOT MOBILE
UNIT;
Verify your Network settings are correct and
you are in the correct mode using the correct
Port.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
RF Send ERROR.\nREBOOT Could not Send.
MOBILE UNIT;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
RF Receive
Could not Receive.
ERROR.\nREBOOT MOBILE
UNIT;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
RF Check
Could not run the RF Survey.
ERROR.\nREBOOT MOBILE
UNIT;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
RF Timeout
Have been trying to contact the host for
ERROR.\nREBOOT MOBILE the radio timeout period (2 minutes
UNIT;
default).
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
REBOOT MOBILE UNIT;
Reboot the Mobile Unit do to loss of
connection.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Retry (Y/N)?;
Try again.
Try to send or receive again, or perhaps
ensuring the printer is cabled to the Mobile
Unit and is on.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
---
11-3
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
TIMEOUT\n\nSending Data;
Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
TIMEOUT\n\nReceiving Data; Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Host Received Data\nAwaiting Mobile Unit has sent and received an
App Reply!;
acknowledgement from the IP stack and
is waiting for the application to return
data.
Most likely host or network issue. Troubleshoot T1113, T1114, T1161,
the customer’s environment. Probable causes T1171, T1187 and
are Database record locking, application
T1194
program failure, Host failure or network failure.
* WAITING TO SEND *;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
TCP Error Reading\nMAC
Could not obtain the Mac Address from
Address.\nREBOOT MOBILE the Mobile Unit.
UNIT;
Possible hardware, driver or stack problem
Contact the Mobile Unit manufacturer.
---
Invalid TIP Command;
Bad internal protocol.
Notify Connect over the WEB incident
reporting system.
---
Session Ended\nBy User or
Host;
User, Host, application or network has
ended the session.
If the user did not end the session, most likely T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
host or network issues. Troubleshoot the
T1194
customer’s environment.
Server Packet Error;
Bad Protocol detected.
Usually a result of bad cabling, power or faulty
transceiver. Also, will receive this if the Mobile
Unit is in the wrong mode for server operation.
11-4
Twin Client Reference
---
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
Error receiving host\nlist from Bad Protocol detected.
Server;
Usually a result of bad cabling, power or faulty
transceiver. Also, will receive this if the Mobile
Unit is in the wrong mode for server operation.
---
Unexpected Server\ndata
received;
Bad Protocol detected.
Usually a result of bad cabling, power or faulty
transceiver. Also, will receive this if the Mobile
Unit is in the wrong mode for server operation.
---
Error starting\nhost
application;
Connected to the server but can not
connect to the distant end.
Configure the server handler to access the
host application.
---
Select Host or App;
Need to choose your Host/application
destination.
User selection required.
---
Connecting...;
Attempting to connect to the
Host/application.
Advisory message.
---
TCP Error\nReading IP
Address\nREBOOT MOBILE
UNIT;
Mobile Unit missing Network IP
information.
Configure the Mobile Unit with the correct
network IP information.
---
Printer start error;
Could not initialize the printer.
Cable or power issue with the printer.
---
Battery too low\nto print;
Not enough power to print.
Replace the battery with a fully recharged
battery.
---
Paper Feed Error\nFix Then
Hit Enter;
Paper in the printer is not ready.
Replace the paper or rethread the paper in the
printer.
---
Printer Error\nPrint Ended;
Can not print.
Check cable, battery, communication settings
and paper in the printer.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
11-5
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
User Count Exceeded.\n
Session Ended;
Possible authorization issue.
Verify that you have the correct number of
licenses for the number of Mobile Units you
are using.
Primary Unavailable\nTrying
Alternate;
First Host IP address not available trying Verify the host address.
the remaining addresses in the Host list.
APMAC.DAT Error\nSession
Ended;
Access point Media Access Control error. Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
MUIP.DAT Error\nSession
Ended;
Mobile Unit IP Error.
Most likely a Mobile Unit network setting issue. T1113, T1114, T1161,
Troubleshoot the customer’s environment.
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Missing Subnet IP\nSession
Ended;
Mobile Unit IP Netmask Error.
Most likely a Mobile Unit network setting issue. T1113, T1114, T1161,
Troubleshoot the customer’s environment.
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Error Opening File;
File is missing.
Verify the configuration files are on the Mobile
Unit. Or perhaps there is a hardware failure.
---
Telnet API\nnot found;
Program files are missing.
Reload program files.
---
Battery Low
Warning\n\nReplace Battery
Soon;
Not enough power to operate the Mobile Replace the battery with a fully recharged
Unit.
battery.
---
No Host List.\nPress any
key\nTo Edit Host IP's;
Have not configured your target hosts.
Configure the target host IP addresses.
---
Unable to Allocate\nFont
Memory;
Mobile unit does not have enough
memory to load the fonts.
Reduce the fonts in use or expand the
memory in the mobile unit.
---
11-6
Reference Tech Note
---
---
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
Font Loading Error;
Could not load the font.
Ensure the font is available to load.
---
Printer Not Ready\nPress R to Can not print.
Retry\nC to Cancel Print;
Check cable, battery, communication settings
and paper in the printer.
---
Mobile Unit in\nDemonstration Running in demo mode.
Mode\nfor TwinClient;
Purchase a license from Connect.
---
Connected to Host;
Successful connection to the target Host. Advisory message.
---
Telnet Mode not\nsupported
on\nthis Mobile Unit;
Telnet Setup files\nnot found.
Reload\nfiles then switch;
This Mobile Unit must be used with a
Order a Connect Server.
Connect Server.
Customer specific configuration files are Load the configuration files into the Mobile Unit
missing.
from Twin Client Manager.
---
Switched Client to\nTelnet
Direct Mode;
Mobile Unit running in Telnet mode direct Advisory message.
to the target Host.
---
Switched Client to\nServer
Based Mode;
Mobile Unit running through a Connect
server in server mode usually at port
1800.
Advisory message.
---
Port 23 is only\nallowed in
Telnet Mode;
Can not set the port to 23 in server
mode. Port 23 is the standard Telnet
port.
Advisory message.
---
---
Not Enough Memory\nTo Run; Mobile Unit does not have the capacity to Expand the Mobile Unit memory.
run the program do to memory
restrictions.
---
Press any key;
---
Press a key to continue.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Advisory message.
11-7
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
TwinClient Telnet;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
TwinClient Server;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
TwinClient TN3270;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
TwinClient TN5250;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
TwinClient TNVT/HP;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
(c) 1991-2004 Connect;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Edit Menu Options;
Menu Title.
Advisory message.
---
Edit Mobile Unit IP;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Edit Server/Host IPs;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Edit Radio Option;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
11-8
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Edit License Key;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Run Site Survey;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Switch Client Modes;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Run TwinClient;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Exit to OS;
Menu Option.
Advisory message.
---
Printer may not be\nplugged
in or\nturned on!;
Can not print.
Check cable, battery, communication settings
and paper in the printer.
---
OUT OF RANGE OF BASE;
Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
CONNECT SERIAL CABLE;
Serial cable not connected to the Mobile Check cable, battery and communication
Unit.
settings for the Mobile Unit.
---
REMOVE SERIAL CABLE;
Remove serial cable from to the Mobile
Unit.
Check cable, battery and communication
settings for the Mobile Unit.
---
PLACE IN CRADLE;
Place the Mobile Unit in the cradle.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
11-9
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
REMOVE FROM CRADLE;
Remove Mobile Unit from the cradle.
Advisory message.
---
ACQUIRING CRADLE BUS;
Attempting to access the cradle through
the serial port you have configured.
Advisory message.
---
Printer Out\nOf Range;
Printer out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point or radio issue. T1113, T1114, T1161,
Troubleshoot the customer’s environment.
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Connection Refused\nBy
Host;
You connected to the target host but the Verify the configuration file has the correct
host disconnected you.
Mobile Unit type and New environment
variable set. Fallback to the Connect Default
to verify the connection.
---
Connection Timed Out;
You connected to the host but did not
Modify the Host parameters for login.
logon in the appropriate time so the host
disconnected you.
---
Connection Failed\nHost Not
Responding;
Could not connect to the Host.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Connection Failed\nHost
Unreachable;
Could not connect to the Host.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Mobile Unit Out\nOf Range,
Unable\nTo Transmit;
Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Mobile Unit Out\nOf Range,
Unable\nTo Receive;
Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
11-10
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
---
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Printer Not\nResponding;
Can not print.
Check cable, battery, communication settings
and paper in the printer.
Printer Out\nOf Range;
Printer out of the coverage area.
Most likely range, access point or radio issue. T1113, T1114, T1161,
Troubleshoot the customer’s environment.
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Print Complete;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Reprint (Y/N)?;
Yes or No prompt for a reprint.
Advisory message.
---
WARNING;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Turning power off\nduring a
session\nwill cause
the\nprogram to restart;
This Mobile Unit will disconnect the
session if powered off.
Mobile Unit manufacturer limitation. Advisory
message.
---
Are you sure (y/n)?;
Yes or No prompt for a confirmation.
Advisory message.
---
You Sure? (YyNn);
Yes or No prompt for a confirmation.
Advisory message.
---
Domain Name Server\nNot
Set;
DOMAIN NAME SERVER not
configured.
Configure the Mobile Unit with the correct
network IP information.
---
Expand the Mobile Unit memory or return the
Mobile Unit for repair.
---
Domain Name Server\nQuery Memory error on the Mobile Unit
Memory Error;
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
---
11-11
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Solution
Reference Tech Note
Domain Name Server\nQuery Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Sending Error;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Domain Name Server\nQuery Mobile Unit out of the coverage area.
Receive Error;
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Could not connect to the DOMAIN NAME Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
SERVER.
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Domain Name
Server\nUnavailable;
Reason
Error loading\nparameter file; Could not load the parameter file.
Reload the correct configuration files.
---
Could not open\ntelnet
interface;
Reload the program files.
---
Could not set\mtelnet options; Could not use the telnet configuration.
Reload the correct configuration files.
---
Setup file\nsetting
mismatch\nReload Setup;
Emulation program selected is not
compatible with the configuration file on
the Mobile Unit.
Remove the emulation and configuration files.
Run clear Telnet on the Mobile Unit then
reload the Mobile Unit with the proper
emulation and configuration files.
---
Display formatting\ntoo large
for\ncurrent screen;
Mobile Unit does not have enough
memory to run your configured
reformatted screens.
Expand the Mobile Unit memory or order a
server from Connect.
---
Mobile Unit\ninitialization
error;
Mobile Unit problem.
Return the Mobile Unit to the manufacturer for
repair.
---
11-12
Could not telnet.
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reference Tech Note
Host/App/Network\nclosed the Customer’s environment disconnected
session;
the Mobile Unit session.
Most likely range, access point, radio, host or
network issue. Troubleshoot the customer’s
environment.
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
Disconnecting...;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Barcode;
Bar code scanning test.
Advisory message.
---
Enter Setup\nPassword;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Enter Profile \nPassword;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Host IP;
Host IP address prompt.
Enter target host IP address.
---
Host Name;
Host name prompt.
Enter target host Name.
---
Port;
Host IP port required.
Enter 23 for telnet or 1800 for a Connect
server. Could also be a different number
depending on the customer’s environment.
Mobile Unit Type;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
WARNING: This will \nend
any\ncurrent session;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
T1113, T1114, T1161,
T1171, T1187 and
T1194
11-13
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Continue (Y/N)?;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
HOST ENTRY;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
VT(100/220)/HP Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Mobile Unit Info;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Emulation Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
ANSI Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Miscellaneous Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Mobile Unit Type;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Control Codes;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Local Echo;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
11-14
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
<BK SP> Sends;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
New Line Mode;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Insert Mode;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Autowrap Mode;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Cursor;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
EMULATION SETUP;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Mobile Unit Type;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Local Echo;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Map Underline;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Break Key;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-15
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
ANSI Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Control Codes;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Backspace Key;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
MISCELLANEOUS SETUP;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Test Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Login Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
TEST OPTIONS;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Printer Test;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Code Test;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
LOGIN OPTIONS;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
11-16
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
User Name;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
User Password;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
ON;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
OFF;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Map;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Don't Map;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Enable Break;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Disable Break;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
7 bit;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
8 bit;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-17
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Send Delete;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Send Backspace;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Mobile Unit Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scanner Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Program Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Special Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Beeper Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Exit to DOS;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Backlight Time;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Enter Key Action;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
11-18
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Reset Options;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Font Size;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Portable Printer;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Reprint Option;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Data IDs;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Internal/External;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Modify Beeps;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Message Beeps;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Identifier;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
AID Scan Setup;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-19
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Long Scans;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Send;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Yes;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
No;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Normal;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Double Wide;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Double High;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Double High and Wide;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Errors Only;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Automatic;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
11-20
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
All Messages;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Reject;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Truncate;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Split;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Do Not Send;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Always Send;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Last Field Only;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Internal;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
External;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
none;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-21
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
monarch;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
pddumb;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
comtec;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
rascal;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
codewriter;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
comtec(S);
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
User Name;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Password;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Frequency:
Duration:
11-22
Hz;
ms;
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
ms;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Select Scanner;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Setup Scanner;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Test;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Scan Operation;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Laser;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Contact/Pulse;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Contact/No Pulse;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Auto/Pulse;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Auto/No Pulse;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Delay:
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
Reference Tech Note
11-23
Error Message Resolution Guide
Message
Reason
Solution
Wand Simulation;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
VT100;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
VT220;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
HP700;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
SETUP;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Mobile Unit IP/Radio;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Host List;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
NULL;
Prompt.
Advisory message.
---
Bad command file name not
recognized
There are incorrect versions of LWP and You must associate to any Access Point first.
UDP802.11 on the terminal.
Obtain correct version of LWP and UDP802.11
from Symbol and reload on the terminal.
T1184
No applications
Twin Client is not loaded on the terminal. Obtain current version of Twin Client from
Terminal Manufacturer or Connect, and load
on the terminal.
T1185
11-24
Reference Tech Note
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
Chapter 12 • AirBEAM Operation
AirBEAM Introduction
The following details the AirBEAM® support that is built into the Twin Client product. It is a step-by-step
procedure on how to enable AirBEAM® to load Twin Client.
The process involves these 4 steps:
1. RF terminal must be loaded with a licensed AirBEAM® client. Symbol has flexible license
methods and it can be done in the terminal or over the RF link.
2. Run Twin Client manager to install package on AirBEAM® server.
3. Use AirBEAM® to load Twin Client package
4. Twin Client will now use Airloader to complete configuration of the terminal.
The terminal will now, on each reboot, check the AirBEAM® server for new packages, then use AirLoader
to manage the emulator configuration. The marriage of these two powerful configuration tools will allow
total “Over the Air” device management.
Reference
AirBEAM® Product Description (from Symbol WEB site) - AirBEAM®, a family of mobility management
tools, is designed to offer Symbol customers a wide array of centrally controlled applications that deliver a
more complete and robust wireless computing experience than was previously possible. AirBEAM® Smart
and AirBEAM® Manager deliver powerful wireless device and infrastructure management applications.
AirBEAM® Safe provides full "end-to-end" security for mobile applications while ensuring a persistent
application connection. Symbol Technologies recognizes the true requirements of the mobile workforce.
AirBEAM® solutions ensure a solid foundation for the management, security, reliability and convenience of
a wireless investment.
AirBEAM® Smart - mobile client management for systems and application software synchronization
AirBEAM® Manager - wireless network management for wireless infrastructure
AirBEAM® Safe - Wireless VPN for full "end-to-end" security providing secure and persistent mobile
application connections across local and wide area networks
Links
Manuals
http://www.symbol.com/services/manuals/terminal/airbeam.html
Product Description
http://software.symbol.com/detail.cfm?prod=1433
Twin Client Reference
• June, 2004
12-1
AirBEAM Operation
AirBEAM Instructions
1. Select the terminal type from the Settings/Options dialog and the emulation from the
Settings/Emulation dialog.
2. Go to the Settings/Terminal Operation dialog to launch the package builder. If the Twin Client
manager can't find the package builder, the user will have to run it manually, and open the proper
package file.
The following are the paths/file names of the package files:
2840 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\2840\AirBeam\TC2840.apr
7940 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\7940\AirBeam\TC7940.apr
8140 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\8140\AirBeam\TC8140.apr
8940 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\8940\AirBeam\TC8940.apr
3000 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\3000s\AirBeam\TC3000s.apr
7500 - ...TwinClient\terminal\Symbol\7500\AirBeam\TC7500.apr
Note: The user must have clicked the AirBEAM button in the operations dialog at least once, because
this is what causes an updated tnconfig.txt file to be generated that winds up in the package.
3. Once the file has been saved, go to the File menu and select Generate APF File.
4. The following screen will appear.
12-2
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
AirBEAM Operation
5. Type a version number in the version field (in any alphanumeric combination, size limit is 30).
Click OK.
6. A “Save As” screen will appear.
7. Save the file as an .APF extension and click Save.
8. Go to the File menu and click Close.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
12-3
AirBEAM Operation
9. The AirBeam Package Builder window will appear as shown below.
10. Go to the File menu and select Open APF File.
12-4
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
AirBEAM Operation
11. Open the APF file. The Airbeam Package Properties dialog box will appear.
12. Click on File and then on Generate APD File.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
12-5
AirBEAM Operation
13. The following Generate AirBEAM Package screen will appear.
14. In the Server Default Package Component Directory, field type in the path where the apd file will be
stored on your PC.
12-6
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
AirBEAM Operation
15. Click OK. The Save As window will appear.
16. Save the apd file in the path specified in the Server Default Package Component Directory field.
Click Save.
17. Continue to have the APF file open.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
12-7
AirBEAM Operation
18. Go to File Menu and select Install Package (APD).
19. The Install AirBEAM Package (APD) window will appear.
12-8
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
AirBEAM Operation
20. Type in the following information.
a. Server IP Address – IP address of the FTP/TFTP server
b. Server FTP User – Specifies the FTP user name to be used during the session.
c. Server FTP Password – Specify the password that corresponds with the FTP user.
d. Server Package Filename - Specify the path where the apd file will be stored on the FTP/TFTP
server
e. Server Default Package Component Directory - Specify a path where the files will load excluding
the APD file.
21. Click OK to begin installing the files to the FTP/TFTP server. An FTP/TFTP session is established
with specified FTP/TFTP IP address.
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004
12-9
AirBEAM Operation
22. If successful, there will be no error message. If an error message does appear, please go to the
AIRBEAM_Package_Builder.pdf on Symbol’s web site for further instructions.
http://www.symbol.com/services/manuals/terminal/airbeam.html
Note: These instructions for building an AirBEAM package are the same for any Symbol terminal.
12-10
Twin Client Reference • June, 2004